Geoidimeter Tech Manual

Software & Data communicationVer. 10 Publ.No. 571 700 001

Geodimeter®

Modifications resulting from technical developments may be in the interest of our customers.Illustrations and specifications are therefore not binding, and are subject to change without priornotice.

Trademarks® Geodimeter, Geodat and Tracklight are registered trademarks and Constructor™ and Autolock™ are trademaks of Spectra Precision AB. All other trademarks mentioned in this publication are the property of their respective owners.

Copyright© by Spectra Precision AB, 1999. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrievel system, or translated in to any language in any form by any means without the written permission of Spectra Precision AB / Geodimeter.

Tenth EditionPrinted in Sweden 03.99. Publ.No. 571 700 001, Arkitektkopia AB.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

IndexWelcome to Geodimeter SoftwareAbout the manual

Part 1 - Memory StructureIntroductionMemory Structure

Part 2 - Memory UnitsIntroductionInternal MemoryGeodat 500

Part 3 - Data CommunicationIntroductionData TransferSerial Communication

Part 4 - SoftwareIntroduction

Chapter 1 - Data CollectingU.D.S - P40Define Label - P41Enter Coordinates - P43Pcode - P45

Chapter 2 - Edit & ViewEditView

ABC

1.11.2

2.12.32.6

3.13.33.9

4.1

4.1.24.1.174.1.194.1.23

4.2.24.2.18

Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS

4.3.24.3.414.3.484.3.564.3.654.3.844.3.91

4.3.1004.3.1074.3.1344.3.2284.3.2434.3.3074.3.3314.3.3354.3.341

Chapter 3 - Field CalculationsStation Establishment - P20Z/IZ - P21Angle Meas - P22SetOut - P23RefLine - P24Area/Vol Calc - P25DistOb - P26Obstructed Point - P28RoadLine - P29RoadLine3D - P39MCF (Moving Coordinates Forward) - P27COGO - P61Angle Meas Plus - P32Athletics - P60Measure Coordinates - P30Robotic Lite

Appendix A - Label ListInfo Codes

A

INDEX

Change data 4.2.7-11Change measuring mode 3.22Check roadline 4.3.118-119 (P29), 4.3.180 (P39) set out point´s position 4.3.57Choose program 4.2 storage unit 4.1.14 (P40)Circular arc 4.3.109 (P29), (P39)Clear memory 4.2.17Clothoid (P29) 4.3.109 (P39) 4.3.139, 4.3.141COGO 4.3.243 (P61)Combination of countdown and offset 4.3.128 (P29), 4.3.183 (P39)Commands serial 3.18Command types 3.13Communication Serial 3.10Computer data output (Part 3) data recording (Part 3)Configuration 4.3.38-40 (P20) user defined output table 4.3Connect devices 3.3-5Coordinate deviation 4.3.58Coordinates enter 4.1.19 (P43) measure 4.3.335 (P30) setout 4.3.60 (P23) setout 4.3.80 (P24) station (P20)Countdown to zero (P23) 4.3.61 (P29) 4.3.124 (P39) 4.3.188

IndexAA-parameter 4.3.138-139, 4.3.141Activate Scalefactor 4.3.38 (P20) Pcode 4.1.23 (P45) Pointlist 4.3.34, 4.3.39 (P20) Weightfactor 4.3.40 (P20)Angle Meas 4.3.48 (P22)Angle Meas Plus 4.3.307 (P32)Area Calc 4.3.84 (P25)Area file 1.2-1.5Area no 1.2-1.5Arrange list 4.3.88 (P25)Arrow keys 4.2, 4.2.4-6ASCII 3.10, 4.1.22, 4.1.25Athletics 4.3.331 (P60)Attach computer 3.3-3.5 external device 3.3-3.5 Geodat 2.11, 3.3-3.5Auto dup 4.1.5 (P40) incr 4.1.5 (P40)Automatic check 4.3.57 (P23)

BBad connection (Part 3)Baud rate 3.14-15 (Part 3)Boning height 4.3.206-207 (P39)

CCII Measurements 4.3.49-55Cable batteries (Part 3) RS 232C (Part 3)Calculate area 4.3.86 (P25)Call U.D.S 4.1.4, 4.1.6Camber 4.3.164 (P39)Capacity unit 2.3, 2.7

A

INDEX

Create job file 1.3 pointcode library 4.1.24 (P45) subroutine 4.1.14 (P40) U.D.S 4.1.2 (P40)Cross section (P39)

DData storage 1.2-5 transfer 3.3-8Data Communication 3.2-29 Station unit - Geodat 3.4 Control unit - Geodat 3.4 Station unit - Computer 3.5 Control unit - Computer 3.4 Station unit - Control unit 3.5 Program 54 - File transfer 3.6Deactivation of PCODE 4.1.25Define label 4.1.17 (P41)Delete file 4.2.5, 4.2.12 prompt 4.2.5Directory 3.18, 4.2.6Distob 4.3.91 (P26)Duplicating label type 4.1.4-5

EEdit 4.2.2-17End label types 4.1.4, 4.1.6End of transmission 3.14, 3.17Enter Coordinates 4.1.19 (P41)Establish station 4.3.2 (P20) Free station 4.3.23 (P20) Known station 4.3.6 (P20) Known station+ 4.3.12 (P20)External memory 2.6

FField calculations 4.3.1

File area 1.2-5 edit 4.2.5 job 1.2-5 transfer 3.2-9Find file 4.2.5 label 4.2.5, 4.2.9 prompt 4.2.5Find and change data 4.2.9-11

GGeodat 2.6Geo/L Geodimeter Language 3.12

HHeight establishment 4.3.2 (P20), 4.3.41 (P21)Height profile (P39) 4.3.144Height setting out 4.3.56-64 (P23), 4.3.130 (P29)

IIncrementing label type 4.1.5Info messages 2.9, App. BInfo 19 3.7Insert prompt 4.2.5Internal Memory 2.3

JJob file Part 1Jump to beginning of file, Beg 4.2.4 to end of file, End 4.2.4

KKill, K 3.19Known reference line (P24) 4.3.68

A

INDEX

LLabel types 4.1.4-6 (P40)Layer 4.3.169 (P39)Length table 4.3.174 (P39)Link program 4.1.6 (P40)Load, L 3.20Long press 4.2

MMCF (Moving Coordinates Forward) 4.3.228Measure angle 4.3.48 (P22)Measure Coordinates 4.3.335 (P30)Measure obstructed point (P28) 4.3.100Measure with refline 4.3.73 (P24)Measuring mode, change 3.22Memory check 3.21 clear 4.2.17 internal 2.3 structure 1.2 units 2.2-13Mode, PG 3.22

NNew data 4.2.7 job file 1.3

OObstructed Point (P28) 4.3.100Output from memory 3.23 user defined table 4.3

PParabola 4.3.143 (P39)Parity settings 3.14-15Pcode activate 4.1.25 (P45)Personal computer 3.4, 3.5

Point list 4.3.32 (P20)Program 20-Station Establishment 4.3.2 21-Z/IZ 4.3.41 22-Angle Meas 4.3.48 23-SetOut 4.3.56 24-RefLine 4.3.65 25-AreaCalc 4.3.84 26-DistOb 4.3.91 27-MCF 4.3.228 28-Obstructed Point 4.3.100 29-RoadLine 4.3.107 30-Measure Coordinates 4.3.335 32-AngleMeas Plus 4.3.307 33-Robotic Lite 4.3.341 39-RoadLine3D 4.3.134 40-U.D.S 4.1.2 41-Define Label 4.1.17 43-Enter Coordinates 4.1.19 45-Pcode 4.1.23 51-Set Protocol 3.16 54-File transfer 3.7 60-Athletics 4.3.331 61-COGO 4.3.243 start 4.2Protocol 3.14-17

RRadial/right angle offset (P23) 4.3.63 (P24) 4.3.76 (P29) 4.3.127 (P39) 4.3.183, 4.3.189-190, 4.3.192, 4.3.200, 4.3.205Read control/station unit (RR/RG) 3.25Reference point (P39) 4.3.212Refline (P24) 4.3.65Replace data 4.2.7Roadline (P29) 4.3.107RoadLine3D (P39) 4.3.134Robotic Lite (P33) 4.3.341

A

INDEX

SScale factor 4.3.38 (P20)Serial commands 3.18 communication 3.9SetOut (P23) 4.3.56Set out point data 4.3.57 (P23)Setting out (P23) with countdown to zero 4.3.61 with radial/right angle offset 4.3.63Setting out (P24) with coordinates 4.3.80 with radial/right angle offset 4.3.76Setting out (P29) with countdown to zero 4.3.124 with radial/right angle offset 4.3.127Setting out (P39) with countdown to zero 4.3.188 with radial/right angle offset 4.3.192Short press 4.2Slopestake 4.3.200Standard labels 4.1.3 (P40)Station coords. (P20)Station Data (P20)Station establishment free station 4.3.23 (P20) known station 4.3.6 (P20) known station+ 4.3.12 (P20)Status 3.29Store road line (P29) 4.3.114 (P39) 4.3.136Structure of memory 1.2Syntax 3.10

TTarget unit 3.8Transfer files 3.3.-8Transition 4.3.109 (P29)Transmission 3.14Trig,TG 3.27Two-face measurement4.3.48 (P22)

UU.D.S (P40) 4.1.2Unit capacity 2.3, 2.7Unknown reference line 4.3.70

VView 4.2.18Volume 4.3.85 (P25)

WWeight factor 4.3.40 (P20)Write, WG/WR 3.28

WELCOME

Welcome to Geodimeter Software & Datacommunication

This manual will describe the different softwares that can beinstalled in Geodimeter system 400, 500, 4000 and 600.It will also describe how the memory is built up, whichmemory units that are available and how to transfer databetween them.Since Geodimeter System 400, 500, 4000 and 600 have thesame flexible design it is possible to upgrade software,memory units and other accessories. The various softwaresmakes it possible to customize your Geodimeter system toyour own way of working.The built in two-way serial communication enables you toconnect external memory units and computers to the instru-ment.

The contents of this manual are as follows:

Part 1 - Memory Structuredescribes how the memory is built up and how data is stored.

Part 2 - Memory Unitsdescribes the internal memory and the external memory,Geodat 500.

Part 3 - Data Communicationcontains instructions on how to transfer files between e.g.Geodimeter and Geodat. This part also describes the diffe-rent serial commands that are available.

B

About this manual

WELCOME

C

Part 4 - Softwareincludes the available softwares and contains step by stepinstructions on how to use each software. The softwares aredivided into three main groups; Data Collecting, Edit &View and Field Calculations.

If you or your colleagues have any comments on this manual,we would be grateful to hear from you. Please write to:

Spectra Precision ABInfo & Market Communication dept.Box 64SE-182 11 DANDERYDSWEDEN

or send an e-mail to:[email protected]

1Memory Structure

1.1

MEMORY STRUCTURE PART 1 INTRODUCTION

Introduction

All Geodimeter memory devices have the same memorystructure. This part will describe how the memory isstructured and what happens when data is stored in andcollected from the memory.

1.2

MEMORY STRUCTURE PART 1

The memory structure of all Geodimeter memory unitsmakes it is easy to check and identify the stored data afterregistration.

The memory is divided in two separate files which are calledJob- and Area-file. Both these files are fully flexible accor-ding to number and size. The only limit is the total storingcapacity available in the memory.

The memory can be used to store two types of data: surveymeasurements (Job-files) and known coordinates (Area-files).These Job- and Area-files consist of separate expansivememories which means that they can be updated individuallyat any time without affecting other Job- and Area-files. Thetotal number of files is limited only to the total capacity ofthe memory. The more raw data stored in Job-files, the lessknown coordinate and elevation data that can be stored inArea-files and vice versa.

JOB

AREA

PCODE

IHSH...

N=200.7654

E=192.0922

ELE=3.487

...

Memory Structure

AREA

JOB

1.3


Job filesIn order to permit later identification of Job files, they aregiven a numeric, alpha or alphanumeric title by the user. Allsurvey data are stored in a Job file. Even field calculatedcoordinate and elevation data are stored in these files. Whencomplete, these files can be transferred separately to a com-puter while the unfinished files can remain in Geodat/Geo-dimeter Internal Memory.

New Job fileWhen you run most of the field calculation programs toGeodimeter the program asks you to name the Job file inwhich you wish to store the measxurement data. Job no=0does already exist. If you wish to create a new Jobfileoutsidethe field programs you enter label 50 (F50) and key in thenew Job number.The next time you registratea measurement the data willbe stored in this Job file.

Area filesKnown coordinates and elevations can be stored by manualkeying in (P43), or by transfer from computer.Area-files, which are used during setting out survey, can beaccessed by giving the name/number of the file in which theset out data is stored. By doing this, the search for the pointis limited to just that particular file. Several different Areafiles can be prepared in advance of the survey job e.g.surveyors often know that they will be working in more thanone single area during the course of a week. All known datafor particular sites can therefore be stored in different Areafiles. This is especially advantageous if several points havethe same numbers. Area no=0 does already exist.

Edit fileAny Area- or Job-file can be edited with the program Edit.With this program you can view and change the contents ofthe file after registration.

F

Label 50Job No

50

STD P0 14:32

Job no=0_

1.4


Free memory space

JOB No

AREA No

2

AB

8

2

3

This is how the memory is structured. The more data that isstored in the Area file the more the Job file will be "pusheddown in the memory" and the more the free memory spacewill decrease.In the above example the three files 2, AB and 8 representdifferent survey jobs.It is possible to continue in an existing Job file. If you returnto the survey site to update the job 2 the new data will beappended on the old file and the files AB and 8 will be"pushed a little further down".

File transferWhen you transfer a Job file or an Area file the files are noterased from the device in which they were originally stored.They are infact copies of the data files which are transferredto the other device.

1.5


When using Program 54 (See Part 3, Data communication) itis sometimes faster to transfer a Job file than an Area file.That is because when transferring an Area file all data in theJob file of the target unit must be pushed down first in orderto create room for the new Area file.

The possibility also exists for deleting Job and Area filesfrom a computer or a total-station. This would be done e.g.to create more room in the Geodimeter Memory Device, seePart 3, Data communication.The operation should be carried out only after a successfulltransfer to a computer or another device.

AREA NoAREA No

JOB No

Free memoryspace

New Area File

JOB No

Free memoryspace

Before After

2Memory Units

2.1

MEMORY UNITS PART 2 INTRODUCTION

Introduction

Geodimeter totalstations includes an internal memory fordata storage. When there is a need of more memory capacity,Geodimeter offers an external memory unit, Geodat 500.This unit can be connected to the instrument during thesurvey work and/or when finished the measuring operations.The external memory unit enables you to transfer data to e.g.a computer without having to bring your instrument withyou.

This part of the manual will describe the internal memoryand the external memory unit Geodat 500.

Note!As a safety measure always backup your memory to protectyourself from memory loss. It is easily done with Program 54which enables you to transfer Job- and Area-files betweenthe different Geodimeter units. See Part 3, Datacommuni-cation for more information.

Note! ☛Backupyourmemory

2.2

INTERNAL MEMORYMEMORY UNITS PART 2

Internal MemoryUnit description

Unit capacityProgram 54Edit

Setting up the Internal Memory as an active device

Geodat 500Unit description

Unit capacityTransfer ParametersMemory structureProgram 54Info messagesData communicationConnecting Geodat with other devices

Setting up Geodat as an active memory device

2.32.32.32.42.42.4

2.62.72.72.72.82.82.92.102.112.12

Part 2

Memory Units

2.3


Geodimeter Total Stations are equipped with an internal me-mory for the storage of raw data, point information and cal-culated coordinate data. The memory volume is completelyself supportive and can be used separately without the needof having other external memory devices connected. Thetotal memory capacity can be enhanced by connecting aexternal memory device such as Geodat 500.

Unit capacityThe internal memory of Geodimeter has a capacity of appr.32Kb or 900-10.000 points if storing of only Pno, HA, VAand SD. Data can be stored in an unlimited number of files.All Field Data=survey point information plus angles,distances and calculated coordinates, are stored in a Job Fileand all Known Data=survey site control point and traversepoint coordinates and elevations are stored in an Area File asdescribed in part 1, Memory Structure.

Unit description

ystemS

2.4


Program 54 - File TransferProgram No 54 is included with Internal Memory. Thisprogram is designed for transferring Job-, Area- and U.D.S-files between different units. Internal transfer is also possiblewithin each unit. See part 3, Data communication for moreinformation about data transfer and program 54.

EditWith the program Edit installed in the Geodimeter it ispossible to view and change data that has been collected andstored in the internal memory. Edit is described in part 4,Software.

When you are using most of the programs to yourGeodimeter you will be prompted to select an active memorydevice in which you can registrate your measurements.If you wish to setup the internal memory as an activememory device outside any program the following steps mustbe taken.

First step to the main menu bypressing the MNU key.

In order to choose 4 Data comm.Press 4.

STD P0 14:32HA: 114.0480VA: 105.2660

Menu 14.321. Set2. Editor3. Coord

4

MNU

See next page

Setting upthe Internal memory as an active memory device

2.5


Choose option 1 Select device.

Choose 4 Imem (Internal memory)

Press YES to continue or No tointerrupt.

Select output table number (0-5depending on instrument) and thenpress ENT.

Control of the output can be done bypressing the REG key of the instru-ment (REG key?) or continous(Slave?). Choose REG by answeringYES or press NO to be able to chooseSlave.

Data com 14:321. Sel. device2. Create table

Menu 14:331. Geodat2. Serial3. Xmem

Imem 14.33

Imem ON?

1

4

From previous page

Imem 14.33

Table no=

YES

Imem 14.33

REG key?

ENT

2.6

MEMORY UNITS PART 2 GEODAT 500

Data Recording Unit

Geodat 500Part No. 571 200 300

Ser. No. 50010001

Geotronics AB Made in Sweden

ON

2.7


Geodat 500 is a new member in our family of data recorders.It is designed for use with Geodimeter Total-Stations (exceptthe series 100) and Control units for both storage and trans-fer of raw and calculated survey data either in the field or inthe office.

Unit CapacityGeodat 500 has a storage capacity of approximately 64Kb or3000 survey points or 4500 points if storing only Pno, HA,VA and SD.Geodat 500 contains an internal battery for data-hold=approximately 2 years without the need to recharge. Afterthat you should leave the instrument to authorized servicewhere the internal battery is replaced.

Transfer ParametersThe protocol can be changed in order to suit the computerused for data transfer while the format is fixed. The protocolcan be set up directly from the keyboard of Geodimeter usingthe program P51, (Set Protocol) or transferred from a com-puter. Program 51 are now contained in the software withinthe instrument.

Geodat 500 - Unit description

ONON/OFF key

Data port

2.8


Memory StructureThe memory can be used to store two types of data: surveymeasurements (Job-files) and known coordinates (Area-files).These Job- and Area-files consist of separate expansive sub-memories which means that they can be updated individuallyat any time without affecting other Job- and Area-files. Thetotal number of files is limited only to the total capacity ofthe memory. The more raw data stored in Job-files, the lessknown coordinate and elevation data that can be stored inArea-files and vice versa.

Program 54 - File transferProgram No 54 is included with Internal Memory. Thisprogram is designed mainly for the transfer of Job-, Area-and U.D.S.-files between different units, e.g. Geodat orpersonal computer. Transfer is also possible within each unit.See more about program 54 in part 3, Data communication.

2.9


Info messages

No Message

20 Illegal label number

21 Parity error

22 No or wrong device is connected22.3 means Xmem error

23 Time out normally seen after attempt totransfer data from device

26 Backup battery to old

30 Syntax error

32 Not found (Files, points and/or programs)

34 Wrong data-record separator

35 Data error (Label not containing any valueor text, i.e 5= )

36 Memory device is full

37 Protocol error

39 Overrun error

45 Incompatible device (e.g. when trying P50)

50 System error - contact your nearestGeodimeter service shop !

2.10


Data Communication

Computer as controllerWhen using RS 232C, the command shall be sent as a nor-mal ASCII string ending with the ETX sequence. In this caseProtocol is always assumed to be 0.

Geo / L Syntax ConstructionO = Output data from memoryL = Load data into memoryK = Erase memoryM = Available memory

File TypesM = Job fileI = Area fileD = Protocol

CommandsOutput / Input / Kill + File Type = Job No / Area No

Examples

OM=1 Output of Job No 1 from Geodat tocomputer

LI=2 Load data into Area 2 from computer toGeodat

KM=SITE2 Erase Job No SITE2 from Job file

O*C Output of all catalogues from Geodat tocomputer

K* Reinitializes the Geodat after System error (Error50), erases all memory

For more information see part 3, Data Communication!

2.11


Connecting Geodat with other devices

Data Recording Unit


Ser. No. 50010001


ON

1

4

38

9

6

5 2

CABLES6. Cable (571 136 754)7. Cable (571 136 752)8. Cable with charger: 115V (571 181 354) 220V (571 181 3529. Cable with charger: 115V (571 136 876) 220V (571 136 874)

DEVICES1. Geodat 5002. Station Unit3. Control unit4. Computer5. External Battery

7

2.12


MNU

4

1

When using most of the programs to your Geodimeter youwill be prompted to choose in which memory device youwish to registrate your measurements.If you wish to setup the memory of Geodat outside anyprogram the following steps must be taken.Connect the Geodimeter to the Geodat and place Geodimeterin the Theodolite Mode by going through the start proce-dure, P0.

You begin with calling upon the mainmenu. Press MNU

In order to choose 4 Data comm.Press 4.

Choose option 1 Select device. Press1.

Setting upGeodat as an active memory device

STD P0 14:32HA: 114.0480VA: 105.2660

Menu 14:321. Set2. Editor3. Coord

Data com 14:321. Sel. device2. Create table

See next page

2.13


3

ENT

YES

Choose option 3 Xmem. Press 3. Ifyou wish to record into the InternalMemory of Geodimeter press 4.Imem.

Press YES to select or NO tointerrupt.

Select output table number 0-5(depending on instrument) and thenpress ENT.

Control of the output can be done bypressing the REG key of theinstrument (REG key?) or continous(Slave?). Choose REG by pressingYES or press NO to be able to chooseSlave.

Menu 14.321. Geodat2. Serial3. Xmem

Xmem 14:32

Xmem on?

Xmem 14:33

Table no=

Xmem 14:33

REG key?

From previous page

3Data

Communication

3.1

DATA COMMUNICATION PART 3 INTRODUCTION

Introduction

Geodimeter totalstations can be connected to externaldevices such as Geodat as described in part 2, Memory units.There is also possible to connect a computer to the instru-ment or connect e.g. the control unit with the station unitand transfer data between the different units. The data canthereafter be edited or used e.g. in a CAD-program.

This part of the manual will describe how to connect thedifferent units and how to transfer data between them.

3.2

DATA COMMUNICATION PART 3

3.33.33.43.43.43.53.53.53.6

3.93.103.123.143.153.183.183.193.203.213.223.233.243.263.273.283.29

Data TransferHow to connect the different Geodimeter devicesStation unit - GeodatControl unit - GeodatControl unit - Personal ComputerStation unit - Personal ComputerControl unit - Station unitPersonal Computer - GeodatProgram 54 - File transfer

Serial CommunicationDescription of the command instructionsGeodimeter Language syntax structureProtocolProgram 51 - Set protocolSerial commands

DirectoryKillLoadMemoryModeOutputPositionReadTrigWrite

Status description

Part 3

Data Communication

3.3


21

3

4 5

67

8

10

11

67

9

12

Data Recording Unit


Ser. No. 50010001


ON

AC/DC ADAPTER32 - 10327Input: 220 V~/50HzOutput: 8V—/120mAType:FW3099



No Cable (Part no)

Adapter Cable (571 125 140)

Battery Cable (571 136 750)

Cable Geodimeter-Geodat (571 135 752)

Cable Geodimeter-Battery-Geodat (571 136 754)

Cable Geodimeter-Battery Computer (571 126 756)

Cable Geodat/Control Unit-Computer with charger 115V (571 136 876)

Cable Geodat/Control Unit-Computer with charger 220V (571 136 874)

Cable Geodimeter-Control Unit (571 181 350)

Cable Geodat-Control Unit with charger 220V (571 181 352)

Cable Geodat-Control Unit with charger 115V (571 181 354)

Cable Geodat-Battery-Control Unit (571 181 356)

Cable Geodimeter-Battery-Radio (571 181 068)

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

How to connect the different Geodimeter devices

3.4


Any Geodimeter total station can be connected to an externaldevice via a built in serial interface. This part of the manualwill describe how to transfer data from and to the Geodi-meter instrument.

Station unit GeodatConnect the Station unit and the Geodat to a battery via thecable 571 136 752/754. Turn on both instruments and enterprogram 54 at the Station unit.Choose (From Xmem, To Imem) if data are to be transferredfrom the Geodat to the Station unit or choose (From Imem,To Xmem ) if data are to be transferred in the otherdirection. See more about program 54 on page 3.6.

Control unit GeodatConnect the Control unit and the Geodat to a charger via thecable 571 181 352 (220V), 354 (115V). Instead of a chargeryou can connect a battery via the cable 571 136 754. Turnon both units and follow the Station-Geodat instructionsabove for file transfer between the two units.Note !To be able to transfer data from or to the RPU´s internalmemory the Control unit has to be detached from the RPU.

Control unit Personal ComputerConnect the Control unit and the computer to a charger viathe cable 571 136 874/876. Instead of a charger you canconnect a battery via the cable 571 136 754 and turn on bothunits. There are two ways to transfer data between theseunits:

1. with Program 54Enter program 54 at the control unit and choose (Fromimem, To serial) to transfer files from the control unit to thecomputer or choose (From serial, To imem) to transfer files

DATA TRANSFER

Data Transfer

Note! ☛

3.5


in the other direction. In the second case the transfer isinitiated by copying the file from the computer to thecommunication port. See more about program 54 on page3.6.

2. with RS-232 commandsBy sending the appropriate commands from the computeryou can transfer data between the control unit andcomputer. Look at page 3.9 for more information aboutserial communication.

Station unit Personal ComputerConnect the Station unit and the computer to a battery viathe cable 571 136 756 and turn on both units. Then followthe Control unit-Personal Computer instructions above forfile transfer between the two units.

Control unit Station unitConnect the Station unit and the Control unit to a batteryvia the cable 571 181 350. Turn on both units and enterprogram 54. First choose (From Serial, To Imem) at the unitthat are to receive data then choose (From Imem, To Serial)at the unit that are to send data. See more information aboutprogram 54 at page 3.6.

Personal Computer GeodatConnect the Geodat and the Personal Computer to a chargervia the cable 571 126 874/876. By sending the appropriatecommands from the computer you can transfer data betweenthe two units. Look at page 3.9 for more information aboutserial communication.

DATA TRANSFER

3.6


Program 54 - File transferConnect the two units with the appropriate cable and switchthem on. The instructions below describes how to transferfiles from the Control unit to the Station unit´s internalmemory:

Operation at the source unit

Choose program 54

Choose from which device you wantto transfer files.In this example we choose 2 Imem.

Here you can choose what type offile you want to transfer:1. A jobfile 2. A areafile or 3 AU.D.S-file. In this example wechoose 1. A jobfile.

Key in the name of the file.In this example we key in Job=1

From 16:122. Imem3. Serial

File 16:121. Job2. Area3. U.D.S

16:12

Job=

See next page

PRG

P54

2

1

1

54

PROGRAM 54 - FILE TRANSFER

3.7


To which device are you going tosend the chosen file/s from the sourceunit.Here we choose 3. serial.

Enter new serial parameters or acceptthe current.Here we accept the current withenter.

Note !Prepare the target unit beforeaccepting the serial parameters for asuccessfull file transfer.

The file/s are sent via the cable andthe display shows "Wait" during thetransfer and you will then exitprogram 54.

To 16:542. Imem3. Serial

P54 16:54

COM=1.8.0.9600

P54 16:54

Wait

ENT

3

PRG

54


Note! ☛

From previous page

Note - Info 19If info 19 appears during a file transfer that means that thefile transfer was not successfull. In that case you should runthe file transfer again and look for where it fails, that is wheninfo 35 (Data error) will show. Then check your file for anyerrors and if possible correct them with the editor.

Note! ☛

See next page

3.8


Operation at the target unit

Choose program 54

From which device are you going tosend files to the target unit.In this case it is 3. Serial.

Enter the serial parameters whichmust be same as the serial parametersat the source unit.In this example we accept the currentwith ENT.

What type of file should the transfer-red files be saved as:1. Job, 2. Area or 3. U.D.S.In this example we choose 1. Jobsince we are transferring a Jobfile.

The unit is now ready to receive. Startthe transfer from the source unit.

From 16:122. Imem3. Serial

P54 16:54

COM=1.8.0.9600

To 16:541. Job2. Area3. U.D.S

To 16:54

Wait

3

3

ENT

P54

PRG

54


3.9


Serial CommunicationThis part of the manual describes the communicationlanguage that is used when the Geodimeter, Control Unit orGeodat is communicating with a personal computer.

In order to meet Geotronics new standard for data transfer.,the protocol parameters must be set as described at page3.14, if you want to use Geodimeter Surveying Tool (GST)which is a software package for data transfer, pre-processingand data management. The suggested protocols are alsorecommended for users who makes their own programs.

SERIAL COMMUNICATION

3.10

DATA COMMUNICATION PART 3 SERIAL COMMUNICATION

Description of the command instructionsThis part of the manual describes the syntax for communi-cation via the RS232 serial communication port in Geodi-meter System 400/4000/500/600.

Not all commands apply to all devices, information aboutthis is given in the command description. Some of thecommands are new and other have additions which will notapply to older versions of the software in the devices.

Bold characters, O, must be written as given.

Text within hooks, <..>, is to be replaced withappropriate characters.

Items within square brackets, [..], is optional and neednot to be entered.

Text within brackets, (..), is an ASCII controlcharacter, e.g. (CR) is equal to ASCII 13 CarriageReturn). The hooks and the brackets shall not bewritten.

All commands must be ended with a carriage return, the linefeed is not necessary. Syntax for End of Command is: (CR)[(LF)]. In the following text this End of Command sequenceis omitted. The instructions contains the following informa-tion:

Purpose: Description of what the command does.

Syntax: <The syntax> {devices for which the command is valid}

Comments: Description of arguments etc.

3.11


Return: Description of what is returned from thereceiver of the command. <status> is equalto the messages given in the info list. Statusis not always returned. However theprompt <eot> is always returned.

Details: Special information.

Examples: Some typical examples.

Abbreviations

<lbl> Label, the tag which identifies the data<dta> Data, the data itself<cmd> One character command<dev> One character device, which can be a direc-

tory in the memory or device.<arg> One or more arguments, all arguments are

one character long. If two arguments aregiven which are contrary to each other thelast one is taken.

<dir> <dev><file> Name of the file to be up- or down-loaded.<etx> End of text. Used to separate data posts

from each other. When transfer from Stn,<etx>=(CRLF). When input to Stn, <etx>=(CR) or (CRLF).

<eot> End of transmission. Tells the receiver thattransfer is completed.

<status> Message. Tells if an error condition occurs,or gives the status of requested system pa-rameter.

, Separates arguments from label.= Separates label from data.(CR) Carriage return terminates the command.(LF) Line feed.


3.12


Devices

Stn Station unitCU Control unitGdt Geodat

Arguments

'I' The Area directory'M' The Job directory'U' The U.D.S program directory'*' All directories'D' Protocol directory (Geodat)

Geodimeter Language (Geo/L) syntax structureThe Geodimeter language is developed in order to create astandard for communication between devices in GeodimeterSystems. The basic Geodimeter data structure is data taggedwith a label.

<lbl>=<dta>

e.g. 7=254.3496 Horizontal angle 254.3496

From this is the language developed by addition ofcommands and arguments in order to be able to direct datato and from a destination.

<cmd><dev><arg>...,<lbl>=<dta>(CR)[(LF)]

e.g. WG, 67=24572.358 Setout coordinate North set to24572.358


3.13


Command typesThere are two types of commands, one that requests datafrom the device, and on that sends data to set the device.Common for both types is that <eot> always is sent whenthe command is executed and the system is ready for a newcommand.

Sender: <complete command>(CR)

Receiver: [<status><etx>][<lbl>=<dta><etx>]...<eot>

The status consists of 1 to 3 digits and is recognized in thatno equal sign (=) is found before <etx>.A request type command always gives a response with statusand/or data posts. While a set type command only responseswith status when an error condition occurs.The meaning of the status number is equal to the normalmessages given in the info list.

When file are transferred:

Sender: <cmd><dir>=<file>(CR)[(LF)]

Sender or receiver: <lbl>=<dta><etx>•

<lbl>=<dta><etx><eot>

Commands when starting up the communication Break <alt><b> to start the Geodimeter PV,20 to start compenstor calibration PV,21 to switch off the Geodimeter

Return signals from the Geodimeter @ the compensator is displayed ! Geodimeter awaits answer, Y(es) or

N(o).


3.14


Protocol

Standard protocol for Station unit, Control unit and Geodat

Station unit From program 582-04Control unit From program 588-01Geodat From program 594-01

Set MeaningBaud rate (F78): 9600Parity (F78): 0 NoneCharacter length (F78): 8 8 bitsStop bits (F78): 1 1 bitTime out: - 10 sec

Software flow control: - Always on(Geodat)

Xon character: - DC1 (17)Xoff character: - DC2 (19)

End of transmission (F79): 62 >

See next page for more information about how to setprotocol.


3.15


Program 51 - Set Protocol

Choose program 51.

Select the device for which you wantto change the protocol.

Here you enter the baudrate (50-19200). Standard baudrates are e.g.300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200.Press ENT.

Enter the parity.No parity=0Odd parity=1Even parity=2Press ENT.

Enter the character length (7 or 8)and press ENT.

PRG

51

PROGRAM 51 - SET PROTOCOL

See next page

Sel device 10:281 Xmem

P51 10:28Set protocol 01:Baud=9600_

P51 10:28Set protocol 02:Parity=0_

P51

1

ENT

ENT

ENT

P51 10:28Set protocol 03:Char. len=8_

3.16


Enter the number of stop bits andpress ENT.

Enter time out in seconds and pressENT. Time out is a parameter thatdetermines the time after which aserial operation is interrupted if thetransfer have been halted or if nodevice is found when trying totransfer. E.g. if trying to transfer databetween a personal computer and aGeodat and the Geodat is not turnedon the operation will be interruptedafter the number of seconds that thetime out parameter is set to.

Switch hardware handshake on=1 oroff=0. When the parameter isactivated the transmitting instrumentwill check that the receiving instru-ment is ready for transfer before itstarts to send and during a transfer.

Switch software handshake on=1 oroff=0. If the receiving instrument isreceiving to much data at a time andthe parameter is activated, the trans-fer is paused until the already senddata has been handled, the transferwill then continue.

PRG

51


P51 10:28Set protocol 04:Stop bits=1_

P51 10:28Set protocol 05:Time out=10_

P51 10:28Set protocol 06:Hardw. Hs=0_

ENT

ENT

ENT

P51 10:28Set protocol 04:Softw. Hs=1_

From previous page

ENT

See next page

3.17


Enter end of transmission.That is the sign which is sentwhen the transfer is ready. The valueis ASCII (62=>).

Press YES or ENT to step to program0 or press NO to reenter the protocolparameters. In this case we pressENT.

You return to program 0, P0.

PRG

51


P51 10:28Set protocol 016:EOT=1.62

P51 10:28

Ready ?

P0 10:28

Temp=20.0_

ENT

From previous page

ENT

3.18

DATA COMMUNICATION PART 3 SERIAL COMMANDS

Directory

Purpose: List of file catalog in memory.

Syntax: O<dir>C {Stn, Gdt, CU}

Comments:<dir> Is the dir argument. 'I', 'M', 'U' and '*' are

used. If <dir> is set to '*' the file catalogfor all directories is output.

Return: <lbl>=<file><etx>••


or<status><etx><eot>

Examples:OMC File catalog of all Job files in the JOB-

directory.

O*C File catalog of all files in the memory.

3.19


Kill

Purpose: Delete files in memory.

Syntax: K<dir>[=<file>] {Stn, Gdt, CU}

Comments:<dir> Valid directories for all devices are M, I and U.

For Geodat is also D valid. If the file is omittedall files in the directory will be deleted.If the directory is given a wildcard * the entirememory will be deleted.

<file> The file entry is the name of the specific file tobe deleted.

Return: <eot>or

<status><etx><eot>

Examples:K* Delete entire memory.

KI Delete all area files.

KM=LOT Delete JOB named LOT.

3.20


Load

Purpose: Load Memory. Data according to the standardformat can be loaded into the memory device.

Syntax: L<dir>=<file> {Stn, Gdt, CU}L<dir><prot>=<file> {Stn, CU}LD {Gdt}

Comments:<dir> Is the dir argument. 'I', 'M', and 'U' are used.

<file> Is the name of the file (max 15 characters). Thefile name is case sensitive.

<prot> Is the protocol number.

Return:<*> When this is received transmission of data

can start.or

<status><eot> If an error occurs.

Details: The transmission can start after the commandis sent and the prompt <*> is send back from the device. Thedata shall be in the Geodimeter standard format. The trans-mission is ended by the EOT character. The EOT is given inF79 for Geodimeter and CU, and as protocol parameter 16in Geodat.

Examples:LI=LOT6 The area file LOT6 is created and can be

loaded when the prompt * is received fromthe device.

LU=15 U.D.S program 15 will be loaded intoGDM or CU.

LD Loads the protocol file into Geodat.

3.21


Purpose: Check for free memory.

Syntax: M[G] {Stn, Gdt}M[R] {CU}

Return: <number of bytes left><etx><eot>


Examples:Command Return

M 31654 Bytes left in memoryMG 31654

Memory

3.22


Purpose: Change measuring mode.

Syntax: PG,3=<arg> {Stn}

Comments:<arg> 0 STD-mode

1 TRK-mode2 D-bar mode3 FSTD-mode4 D-bar mode, high resolution

Return:<eot>


Details: The command will work whether the instru-ment is locked on a target or not.

Examples:PG,3=0 Change to STD-modePG,3=1 Change to TRK-modePG,3=2 Change to D-bar modePG,3=3 Change to FSTD-modePG,3=4 Change to D-bar mode, high resolution

Mode

3.23


Purpose: Output from memory.

Syntax: O<dir>=<file> {Stn, Gdt, CU}O<dir><arg> {Stn, Gdt, CU}O<dir><prot>=<file> {Stn, CU}OD {Gdt}

Comments:<dir> Is the dir argument. 'I', 'M', and 'U' are used.<file> Is the name of the file (max 15 characters). The

file name is case sensitive.<prot> Is the protocol number.<arg> Is the argument field. One argument can be

used, 'C'. The 'C' argument will give anoutput of the file catalog.

Return: <lbl>=<dta><etx>••



Examples:OM=A45 Job file A45 is send out.OU=3 U.D.S program no 3 is output.

Output

3.24


Purpose: Position the Station unit with servo.

Syntax: WS=<servo command> {Stn}

Comments:<servo command>The servo command is divided in the following parts:<cmd><ang><tol>[<ang><tol>]

<cmd> P Tells Geodimeter to perform a positiontask, to given angles in horizontal and/orvertical. The angles can be given either viathe instrument keyboard or by the serialcommand Write (WG). Enter the labels 26and 27 with the correct values and then usethe WS command to perform the positio-ning.

<ang> H Horizontal positioning

V Vertical positioning

<tol> nn Positioning tolerance, given in cc (0-99).Tolerance=0 means no tolerance given,typical accuracy is 2cc if set to 0.

Return: <eot>or

<status><etx><eot>

Examples:WS=PH05V10 Position horizontal with 5cc accuracy

and vertical with 10cc accuracy.WS=PH01 Position horizontal with 1cc

accuracy.WS=PV15 Position vertical with 15cc accuracy.

Position

3.25


Read

Purpose: Read Station unit or Control unit. Read ofmeasured data or data in specific labels.

Syntax: RG=[<arg>][,<lbl>] {Stn}RR=[<arg>][,<lbl>] {CU}

Comments:<arg> [S] Standard output

N Name outputD Data outputV Numeric output item by itemT Test if signal from target. 300 is returned

if NO signal. 301 is returned if signal.<lbl> If a label is given, the contents of that label is

returned. When omitted measured data is re-turned.

Return: <status><etx> Standard output<lbl>=<dta><etx>e.t.c....<eot>

or<status><etx> Name output<lbl name>=<dta><etx>e.t.c....<eot>

or<status><etx> Data output<dta><etx>e.t.c....<eot>

or<status><etx> Numeric output<lbl><etx><dta><etx>e.t.c....<eot>

3.26


or<status><etx> Message or<eot> Meas signal test

or<lbl><dta> Specific label<eot>

or<lbl name><dta><etx> Specific label<eot> with name

or<dta><etx> Specific label<eot> only data

or<lbl><etx> Specific label<dta><etx> numeric<eot>

Details: When read of measure data, the output isdependent on how the output table in the Geodimeter is set.See Geodimeter User Manual for detailed information.

Examples:Command Return Command Return

RG 0 RGN,5 Pno=1047=10.23458=101.1005 RGN 09=145.324 HA=10.2345

VA=101.1005RGD 0 SD=145.324

10.2345101.1005 RGV 0145.324 7

10.2345RGT 301 8

101.1005RG,5 5=104 9

145.324

SERIAL COMMANDS

3.27


Trig

Purpose: Start of distance measurement in Station unit

Syntax: TG[<arg>] {Stn}

Comments:<arg> Is the argument for short range '<' or longrange '>' measure. The '<' is default and need not to beentered.

Return: <eot>or

<status><etx><eot>

Examples:TG or TG< Start of short range measure

TG> Start of long range measure

3.28


Write

Purpose: Write data into the Station unit or Controlunit. All labels that can be set by the functionkey in the system can be written.

Syntax: WG,<label>=<data> {Stn}WR,<label>=<data> {CU}

Comments:<label> 0-99<data> Maximum 9 digits for numeric type labels, and

maximum 16 characters for ASCII type labels.

Return: <eot>or

<status><etx><eot>

Examples:WG,5=10 Label 5 set to 10 in Station unit.

3.29

DATA COMMUNICATION PART 3 STATUS DESCRIPTION

Status description

DescriptionValue

0

3

4

5

10

20

21

22

23

24

30

35

Instrument operating correctly, all required dataare available.

The measured distance has already beenrecorded. A new distance measurement isrequired.

Measurement is invalid and recording notpossible.

Recording is not possible with the selected modesetting of the Geodimeter instrument.

No device connected

Label error. This label cannot be handled by theinstrument.

Parity error in transferred data (betweenGeodimeter and interface).

Bad or no connection, or wrong deviceconnected.

Time Out

Illegal state to execute command. Occurs whentrying to communicate in C2-position.

Syntax error.

Data error.

4Software

4.1

SOFTWARE PART 4 INTRODUCTION

Geodimeter totalstations can be equipped with a number ofdifferent softwares in order to make the surveying workmore efficient. This part of the manual will describe thedifferent softwares that are available, how they are operatedand what you can achieve by using them.

Choose programBoth the numeric- and the alphanumeric keyboard areequipped with a program key, hereafter referred to as thePRG-key.

By pressing this key you can start any program that areinstalled in your instrument.There are two ways to choose a program; short press andlong press on the PRG-key. On the next side we will describethe two different methods.

Introduction

Program keyPRG

4.2


Short pressWith a short press on the PRG-key you will get the followingdisplay appearance:

Key in the desired program number and press enter toconfirm the choice, e.g. 20 ENT will enter program number20, Station Establishment.

Long pressWith a long press on the PRG-key you step to the programmenu. Here you can display all the available programs. Anyprogram that are available but not installed in your instru-ment is displayed with two brackets,( ).

Key functions:Dir: Step between the U.D.S- and PRG-library<-- --> Step backward / forward in the chosen library.Exit/MNU: Exit without starting any programENT: Start the chosen program

Note - arrowkeysIf the arrowkey is held depressed you will automatically stepto the next/previous program without having to press the keyrepeatedly.

STD P0 10:16

Program=20

<-- Current library and program no<-- Instrument model and program ver<-- Current program name<-- Key functions

PRG P20 10:16460 582-09Stn establ.Dir <-- --> Exit

Note ! ☛

4.3


ENT

User definedstorage of control data in the field calculation programsIt is possible to define what results to be stored in the JOBfile using the field calculation programs.In some programs you can only add information and in someyou can define data all by yourself.

See page 4.6 for a complete list of the programs that can beconfigured.

When you start any of these programs by the program lib-rary you will get the following display appearance:

Choose 1 Run to start the program without any con-figuration or press 2 to configurate the program.Press the CL-key to exit from this menu and step to thecurrent program.

Configurate the user defined output tableWhen you press 2 you will get the following displayappearance:

Choose one of the alternatives (press ENT for more) or press1 or the CL-key to step to the previous menu.

P23 14:171 Run2 Config

<-- Current program no and time<-- Start program without any config.<-- Configure program

Note! ☛Whenpressingthe PRG-key on thecontrolunit inlocalmode youcan onlyaccess thismenu.

P23 14:171 Exit2 View table3 Enter user tbl

<-- Current program no and time<-- Step to the previous menu<-- View the current output table<-- Configure table

See next page

4.4


2 View tableIf you press 2 you will view the current output table:

This is position 1 in the output table. Press YES or ENT toview the next position or step to the previous menu withNO. When all positions in the output table are viewed youwill return to the previous menu.

3 Enter user tableIf you press 3 you will enter the output table:

This is position 1 in the output table. Enter the first label noand press ENT. Press only ENT when you are finished.The new output table will be default.

<-- Current program no and time<-- Table position<-- Label

P23 14:17User tbl pos 1Label no=_

<-- Clear the current user table P23 14:174 Clear user tbl

From the previous page

How to use

P23 14:17Def. tbl pos 1Label : Pnomore ?

<-- Current program no and time<-- Table position<-- Label<-- View more ?

4.5


4 Clear user tableIf you press 4 you will get the following display appearance:

Press YES or ENT to delete the current output table or pressNO to cancel.Note !When you delete the output table the standard output tablewill be default.

P23 14:17

Clear user tblAre you sure ?

Which data can be stored in a specific program ?On the next page is a list over the labels that are alwaysstored in a specific program (Always) and which labels thatthe operator can choose whether to include or not (Stan-dard). E.g. in program P24, RefLine, the Reference pointdata (labels 5, 37, 38...) are always stored. The operator canby configu-rating the program via the configuration menu atstartup choose whether to include any of the standard labelsor not, e.g. measured point data (5, 6, 37...). As default whenno configuration has been made, all standard will be stored.

4.6


Always=cannot be changedStandard=can be changed

Program configuration list

SetOut - P23Always: NoneStandard: 5, 40, 41, 42*

RefLine - P24(Measure)Always: (5, 37, 38, 39, 5, 37, 38, 39, 44)¤Standard: 5, 6*, 37, 38, 39*, 72, 73, 42*

(SetOut with Radofs/RTofs)Always: (5, 37, 38, 39, 5, 37, 38, 39)¤Standard: 5, 72, 73, 42*

(SetOut with coordinates)Always: (5, 37, 38, 39, 5, 37, 38, 39)¤Standard: Same as P23, modified by config P23.

DistOb - P26Always: 5, 5, 7, 11, 10, 14Standard: None

Obstructed Point - P28Always: 20, distBC, Pno, 37, 38, 39, 7, 11, 10, 14Standard: Data for point A and B

RoadLine - P29(SetOut)Always: NoneStandard: 80, 83, 40, 41, 42*, 39*

(Measure)Always: NoneStandard: 80, 83, 4, 37, 38, 39*

* These labels (height) are only stored if height measurement hasbeen included in the station establishment.¤ These labels are only stored if using a known reference line.

4.1.1

PRG

40

PROGRAM 40 - U.D.SDATA COLLECTING CHAPTER 1

Chapter 1

U.D.S - P40Geodimeter Standard LabelsLabel TypesHow to useExamples

Define Label - P41How to use

Enter Coordinates - P43How to use

Pcode - P45How to use

4.1.24.1.34.1.44.1.84.1.12

4.1.174.1.18

4.1.194.1.20

4.1.234.1.27

Data Collecting

4.1.2

PRG

40


U.D.S - In generalU.D.S will allow the operator to create own User DefiniedSequences for the registration and display of measurement,coding and administrative data. Creation of the sequences iscarried out directly from the keyboard of the instrument ortransferred from an external device via the serial port.

What advantages can be gained with U.D.S

It is possible to create and store up to 20 U.D.S´s in theinstrument.

The existence and use of a buffer memory in the instru-ment allows data to be stacked, which leads tosimplified and accelerated data registration.

It is possible to create and store up to 16 user definiedlabels (No 84-99) in the instrument.

Measurement status is always under complete operatorcontrol with the help of the automatic display ofprogram prompts in the instrument.

All labels and values can be duplicated, incremented ordecremented automatically. This means that the labelscan be registered in a Geodimeter Memory Device(GMD) without even seeing them in the display andwithout the need to press the ENT key for duplicatingand incrementing/decrementing.

PRG

40

In general

•

•

•

•

•

4.1.3

PRG

40


Program 40 - Program GenerationProgram 40 must be selected in order to create an U.D.S.Once the sequence has been created it is not necessary to runthe program 40 in order to access the UDS. It is stored in thememory of the instrument and can be directly accessed bychoosing the UDS program number. It will also remainwithin the instrument until it is deleted or changed by theoperator. Program 0-19 are reserved for UDS´s. Thesequence is generated by specifying the program No, theorder of the desired labels=program prompts and label types.Finally, the label No 79=End must be used to either termi-nate, loop or link the U.D.S to another U.D.S.

Creation of U.D.S'sOn the next page is a list of Standard Labels. In addition,user definied labels can be set with Program 41 which isdescribed on page 4.1.17. The list and table of label types isnot sufficient to explain how and when certain labels andlabel types are displayed in the instrument during thecreation of your U.D.S's.You simply key in the label's corresponding number and typein the desired order. In the event of making a mistake duringthe creation of the U.D.S, the opportunity of correcting themistake is given by the program asking you to confirm thechoice of both label and label type. Your choice of labels andlabel types is more easily understood when you start tocreate your own U.D.S's together with the help of thefollowing examples.

Geodimeter Standard LabelsThe label list containing Label 0-83 possess certain functionsin Geodimeter operation. While creating U.D.S's, the opera-tor can change the prompt text (P41) but the function of thelabel will remain the same. Labels 84-99 are reserved forarbitrary use by the user and can be definied with the pro-gram 41, Set Label. Due to the flexibility of the system,almost all label types can be used with all labels. In P0 theonly types valid are 2, 6, 7, 8. Info 41 is shown if a wronglabel type is used.

In general

Note ☛Info 41

4.1.4

PRG

40


Labeltypes

Label typesThe label type determines the function of the label.

No

0

1

2No3

4

5

6o7

8

9

10

Description

Collect values directly from theGeodimeter.

Enter data manually.

Set values directly in theGeodimeter.

Display both prompt and the lastregistered value.

Automatic in-/decrementation ofthe previously stored value.

Return the U.D.S to the firstprogram step.

Return the U.D.S to P0.

Link the present U.D.S to anotherU.D.S.

View a value.

Start another U.D.S inside thecurrent U.D.S as a subroutine.

Choose memory unit and Job file.

Label Type

Registration

Prompting label

Set *

Label TypDuplicating(auto. or man.)l TypeIn-/decrementing(auto. or man.)

Loop/repeat END *

Single Program END *el TypeLink Program END *

View label *

Call U.D.S-program *

Logon *

* Can not be stored

4.1.5

PRG

40


Labeltypes

0 - RegistrationRegistration of raw and/or calculated values from theGeodimeter. This type of label is chosen when measured andcalculated values can be collected directly from theGeodimeter, e.g. HA, VA, SD, N, E, ELE, HD, VD.

1 - Prompting labelEnter data manually after the prompt. The default value ofthe label will not be displayed.

2 - SetThese pre-set values e.g. Label 21=Hor.ref. angle can be setdirectly in the Geodimeter

3 - Duplicating (automatically or manually)This label type is used for displaying both the prompt andthe last registered value (e.g. SH=0.75). This value can bechanged by overwriting or accepted by depressing ENT.The first time you key in the label when you run the U.D.Syou are able to choose if the duplication should be automaticor not. If so the next time you enter this program step thelabel is automatically stored without being displayed.

4 - Incrementing/Decrementing (automatically or manually)The previously stored value belonging to the same label e.g.Pno=3 is automatically incremented/decremented and can beaccepted and stored into GDM either manually or automati-cally. Displayed values can be overwritten and/or accepted.The first time you key in the label when you run the U.D.Syou are able to choose if the incrementation/decrementationshould be automatic or not. If so the next time you enter thisprogram step the label is automatically incremented/decremented and stored without being displayed.

Note - when using Autodup or Autoincr/decrSometimes you are able to change the "invisible" valuesduring a U.D.S sequence by using the function key and entera new value for the label, e.g. F6, ENT, SH=1.0, ENT.

Note ☛

Note ☛Forlabel 21the onlylabeltypesthat canbe usedare 1&2

Note ☛If thesamelabelandtypeexists inan UDSthat arelinkedorcalledupon,the dup-lication,in-/de-crementa-tionremains.

4.1.6

PRG

40


Labeltypes

5 - Loop/repeat ENDChoice of this label type will automatically return the U.D.Sto the first program step after registration of the last dataitems in the measurement sequence.

6 - Single Program ENDChoice of this label type will return the U.D.S to program 0after registration of the last data items in the measurementsequence.

7 - Link Program ENDChoice of this label type will link the present U.D.S to an-other U.D.S of the operators choice, allowing the field opera-tion to be registered as one complete sequence. Note that inthe linked U.D.S the logon procedure will not be run.

8 - View LabelThis label type is used when you wish to look at certainvalues without changing them. Useful if you have Auto dup./Auto inc. Note that the values will only show if you have ameasured distance. Change any value with the function key.

9 - Call U.D.SIf you choose this label type you are able to start anotherU.D.S program as a subroutine. When the subprogram isfinished you return to the next step in the original U.D.S.You can call upon U.D.S's in max. 4 levels, otherwise youwill get Info 47. Note that the linked U.D.S. must end withtype 6 (Single program END).Note !The labels that are unique in the subprogram will not bereset when you restart the original U.D.S program.

10 - LogonChoose in which unit and in which Job file you wish to storethe data when you make a registration. This label type canonly be accessed when starting the U.D.S from computer. Inorder to register anything a logon step must be run throughotherwise Info 10 will appear when trying to register, link orcall.

Note! ☛

4.1.7

PRG

40


Prog.No

LabelNo

535152567479

23622179

5

4

678979

LabelType

(10)333116

(10)11117

4

3

30005

Is this how you would like to set up your own program ?

1

3

Promptsused inU.D.S

LogonOperatDateTimeTempPressEnd

LogonStnIH

RefObjHA ref

End

Pno

Pcode

SHHAVASD

END

Remarks

Program generationof general project/Job data programYESValue seen, accept or key in newValue taken directly from GDM.-"-Prompted for and keyed in-"-Single program, return to P0

Program generationof inst.stn/Ref.Obj data programYESPrompted for and keyed in-"--"--"-Link this program to Prog. 3.

Program generationof survey point data program

Incr/decr value seen, accept orkey in new.Duplicated value seen, accept orkey in new-"-Value taken directly from GDM-"--"-Prog. loops back to first step inthis sequence=Pno

2

4.1.8

PRG

40


The programs (sequences) on the previous page are only examplesof how you could design your field data recording sequences.Normally the surveyor is aware of the different types of projectsin which he or she shall be involved and it is therefore possibleto design in advance those programs which he or she may needand store them in Geodimeter. In the event of some unusualsurvey task turning up for which time is no stored program, itis a case of just entering the required sequence into Geodimeterdirectly in the field.

Select program 40 (U.D.S).

You are now ready to begin withcreation of the U.D.S's 1, 2 and 3 onthe previous page. First key in 1 andENT.

STD P0 10:16HA=392.9095VA=102.8955

P40 10:17

Prog.no=

See next page

ENT

ENT

PRG 40

1

How touse

How to use

4.1.9

PRG

40


From previous page.

Enter a name for the U.D.S -pro-gram. Press the ASCII-key to enter analphanumerical name (max 16characters). Press ENT when ready.

Press YES or ENT to put logon firstin the program. (See page 4.1.14 forinformation about logon).

Step 1 is Label No for operator. Keyin 53 and ENT.

Label type=duplication type (3) as itis often same operator who uses theinstrument daily. Key in 3 and pressENT. If you leave the line blank youwill return to the previous menu.

P26 10:17P1Name=_

See next page.

How touse

P26 10:17

Prog.no=1View ?

Note !If the program alreadyexists this questionappears. Press YES toview the program orNO and YES to deleteit.

Note ☛

P40 10:16P1 Step no 1Label no=_

53

P40 10:16P1 Step no 1Label :OperatType = _

ENT3

P40 10:16

Logon?

YES

ENT

4.1.10

PRG

40


From previous page.

Here you have a chance to changeyour mind e.g. if you made a mistakewith either label choice and/or labeltype. In this example we press YES.

Label no for Date. Key in 51 andENT.

This value will be taken directly fromGDM as you have chosen label type0, you will not need to key in thedate.Key in 0 and ENT.

Press YES to accept the label.

Carry on in this manner using thefilled in example on page 4.1.7. Ifyou loose track as to where you are inyour sequence you can easily see thisby checking on the step No.

How touse

See next page.


P40 10:16P1 Step no 1Dup:OperatOk?

YES

51

P40 10:17P1 Step no 2Label :DateType = _

0 ENT

P40 10:17P1 Step no 2Meas:DateOk?

YES

4.1.11

PRG

40


From previous page.When you come to step No 6 whichis the point at which you wish toterminate the sequence, do as follows:

This is equivalent to choosing LabelNo 79=END. Press only ENT.

This is the label type for a single non-linked sequence. Key in 6 and ENT.

Key in YES to accept the label.

You are automatically returned to theprogram 0. In order to be able tocontinue with sequence creation it isnecessary to choose Program 40before starting with Program 2.


P40 10:21P1 Step no 6Label :SpecialType =

P40 10:21P1 Step no 6SingleOk?

STD P0 10:21HA:32.9960VA:48.9088

6

ENT

YES

How touse

4.1.12

PRG

40


U.D.S ExamplesThe design of U.D.S's is of course dependent on how yourexisting software accepts data recorded in GeodimeterRecording Devices. Formatting possibilities must exist withinthe system so as to be able to present the recorded andtransferred data in a suitable lay out. This may entail somesmall changes to existing data transfer programs or even thenecessity to create some new ones.

Recording of raw data

Prog 2 - Stn Est

Label Text TypeLogon 10

2 Stn 13 IH 162 RefObj 121 HAref 179 END 7

Prog 1 - General

Label Text TypeLogon 10

53 Operat 351 Date 352 Time 356 Temp 174 Press 179 END 6

U.D.Sexamples

Prog 4 - Survey with no heights

Label Text Type5 Pno 44 Pcode 37 HA 08 VA 09 SD 079 END 5

Prog 3 - Survey with heights

Label Text Type5 Pno 44 Pcode 36 SH 37 HA 08 VA 09 SD 079 END 5

4.1.13

PRG

40


Recording of raw data and coordinates

Prog 6 - Survey

Label Text Type7 HA 08 VA 09 SD 079 END 5

Prog 5 - Survey

Label Text Type5 Pno 47 HA 08 VA 09 SD 079 END 5

U.D.Sexamples

Prog 8 - Survey with heights

Label Text Type4 Pcode 35 Pno 46 SH 37 HA 08 VA 09 SD 037 N 038 E 039 ELE 079 END 5

Prog 9 - Survey with no heights

Label Text Type4 Pcode 35 Pno 47 HA 08 VA 09 SD 037 N 038 E 079 END 5

Prog 10 - Surveywithout heights and PcodeLabel Text Type5 Pno 47 HA 08 VA 09 SD 037 N 038 E 079 END 5

4.1.14

PRG

40


Create asubroutine

Choice of storage unitIf you press YES or ENT at the question "Logon?" when youcreate your U.D.S- program , you will be able to choose inwhich memory unit and in what Job-file all data will bestored when registering.Note !If this logon routine is not included Info 10 is shown and noregistration can be done even if pressing the REG-key.

Create a subroutineLook at page 4.1.12. Program 1 is a general U.D.S-programthat are useful whenever you want to start a U.D.S sequence.Instead of manually initiating this program you can call uponthis program from any of your other U.D.S programs.Simply press ENT and choose type 9, Call (Program 1), atthe second step in your U.D.S-program. This means thatwhen you start your U.D.S program, e.g. Program 2, theprogram automatically initiates program 1, the generalU.D.S-program. When the general program is run throughyou are returned to the next step in program 2.

Enter program 40 and choose tocreate program 2. Answer YES tologon. At step 1 press ENT.

Choose label type 9, Call, and pressENT.


P40 10:21P2 Step no 1Label : SpecialType =_

See next page

ENT

9

4.1.15

PRG

40


Here you enter the program you wantto call. In this example we chooseprogram 1 and press YES (ENT).

Accept the first program step withYES or ENT. Press NO to reenter.Continue with the following programsteps.

Start program 2.

First the program runs through thelogon procedure and you choose inwhich Job file you wish to store thedata.

From previous page

Create asubroutine


P40 10:21P2 Step no 1Label : SpecialCall=_

Now lets start program 2 and see how it works.

2

STD P0 10:21

Program=_

UDS P2 10:21

Job no=3_

ENT

1 YES

4.1.16

PRG

40


2

UDS P2 10:211:Xmem off2:Imem off3:Serial off

ENT

UDS P1 10:21Step:5 StoreInstno=69000_

ENT

YES

Choose in which memory unit youwish to store the data.

Now the program calls upon program1. Enter the general parameters...

This is the last step in program 1.When you press ENT you will returnto step 2 in program 2.

The program will continue step bystep to the end of the program.

From previous page

Create asubroutine

UDS P1 10:21Step:2 StoreDate=1992.0211_

UDS P2 10:21Step:2 StoreStn=_

4.1.17

PRG

41

PROGRAM 41 - DEFINE LABELDATA COLLECTING CHAPTER 1

Program 41Define Label

PRG

41

In general

With program 41 you can define label no 84-99.Program 41 - Define Label is included in the followingprogram:

Define Label - In general

Program 40U.D.S

4.1.18

PRG

41

PROGRAM 41 - DEFINE LABELDATA COLLECTING CHAPTER 1

Select program 41 (Define Label).

Choose any label between 84-99. Inthis example we choose 84 and pressENT.

Here you can see any old definitionthat may exist. Press the ASCII-keyto adopt ASCII-mode and use theASCII table and key in the approp-riate characters, e.g. 71 68 84 32 7879 (GDT NO) and press ENT.

When you are ready press only ENTinstead of keying in a label no. Youwill now return to program 0.

STD P0 10:16HA=392.9095VA=102.8955

P41 10:16

Label no=_

P41 10:16

Change to=F84

P41 10:16

Label no=_

Turn the instrument on and disengage the dual-axis compensatorwith function 22.

ENT

PRG 41

ENT84

PRG

41

In general

How to use

∝ENT

4.1.19

PRG

43

PROGRAM 43 - ENTER COORDINATESDATA COLLECTING CHAPTER 1

PRG

43

In general

Enter Coordinates - In generalWith program 43 you can carry out storage of knowncoordinates. These known values are stored in an Area file.The data contained in these AREA files will take the formatPno, Pcode, Northing, Easting and Elevation and must bekeyed in manually. Coordinates are entered with up to 7positions and 3 decimals.

Transfer of point coordinates and elevation data banksbetween computer and the different Geodimeter units iscarried out with program 54, File transfer, or by sendingserial commands. See part 3, Data communication for moreinformation.

As the total number of Area files is unlimited (device memorycapacity is only limitation), the same point numbers can beused as long as they are stored in different Area files. Samepoint numbers can be stored in the same Area file, however,it is always the point nearest the beginning of the file whichis recalled for use in Station Establishment -P20 and SetOut -P23 calculations. If a particular point has to be updated in anArea file, this can be done with Edit, if the software is in-stalled in your instrument.

Program 43 - Enter coordinates is included in the followingprograms:

Program 21Z/IZ

Program 23SetOut

Program 29RoadLine

Program 24RefLine

Program 40UDS

Program 39RoadLine 3D

Program 43Enter Coordinates

Program 61CoGo

4.1.20

PRG

43


Select program 43 (EnterCoordinates).

In which device do you want to storethe point coordinates. In this examplewe choose 1 Imem.

Key in the name of the Area file inwhich you wish to store the pointcoordinates and height values. In thisexample we key in 25 and ENT.

Do you want to store heights? In thisexample we choose to do so. PressYES (ENT) to accept or NO tocancel.

STD P0 10:16HA=392.9095VA=102.8955

Sel device10:171 Imem2 Xmem

P43 10:16

Area=_

P43 10:16

HT measure ?

PRG 43

ENT

25 ENT

YES

Switch on the instrument and go through the Start procedureuntil the instrument is in theodolite mode.PRG

43

How touse

How to use

1

4.1.21

PRG

43


From previous page.

Key in the first point number youwish to store in the Areafile. In thisexample we key in 1 and ENT.

Here you have an opportunity toenter a Pcode for the point. Theprogram will propose the last Pcodeentered. Accept it, key in a new orleave it blank.

Key in the Northing value of pointnumber 1 and press ENT.

Key in the Easting value of pointnumber 1 and press ENT.

P43 10:17Pno=

P43 10:16Pno=1Pcode=_

See next page.

P43 10:16Pno=1Pcode=1N=3456789.012

P43 10:16Pno=1Pcode=1E=1234567.789

1

ENT

ENT

ENT

How touse

ENT1

4.1.22

PRG

43


From previous page.

Key in the height of point number 1and press ENT.

Press YES to store point number 1 orpress NO to cancel. In this examplewe press YES.

Key in the next point number or pressonly ENT when you are finished. Inthis example we press ENT.

You are now returned to program 0.

ENT

YES

How touse

P0 10:17

Temp=20.0_

P43 10:17Pno=_

P43 10:17Pno=1Pcode=1Store ?

ENT

P43 10:16Pno=1Pcode=1HT=123.890

4.1.23

PRG

45

PROGRAM 45 - PCODEDATA COLLECTING CHAPTER 1

4.1.24

PRG

45


Pcode - In general

Pcode provides the operator with the opportunity of callingupon a point code library which can be directly created fromthe instrument keyboard. After Pcode library creation andkeying in of the Pcode number, the appertaining Pcode namewill be displayed either for acceptance or rejection andthereafter recording.

How do I create my very own point code libraryThis is done simply by choosing the program No 45=Pcode.It then simply becomes a task of keying in the numericalvalue of the point code followed by its equivalent alpha oralpha-numerical title. The instrument automatically adoptsthe ASCII mode for this purpose and you consult the ASCIItable in your instrument user manual for the keying in of thealpha/alpha-numerical codes. Pcode numbers range from 1-250; if Nos above this range are chosen INFO 31 is dis-played. The equivalent alpha point code can contain up to 16characters; in cases where 16 characters are required, theprompt "Text=" will disappear from the display during thecreation of the point code.

Maximum of stored pointsThe maximum number of characters which can be stored inthe point code library is limited to 800. In other words if allthe point codes stored in the library have a maximumnumber of characters of 16, there would be enough room for50 point codes. However, as most point codes areabbreviated, the storage room of 800 characters shouldprovide the operator with enough storage place for all pointcodes her or she will require for storage of detail point codenumbers during e.g. a tacheometric exercise.

Note!If using Geodat or an external memory device, the numericvalue of the point code is stored, not the title.

PRG

45

Note ! ☛Info 31

Note ! ☛

In general

4.1.25

PRG

45


Activation/deactivation of PcodeAfter the installation of Pcode in the instrument, it can beactivated or deactivated with the help of menu 16-Switches.

This means that if Pcode is set to ON the keying in of anumerical point code in e.g. an U.D.S, will automaticallyresult in the equivalent alpha/alpha-numerical point codebeing displayed in the instrument; its correctness is con-firmed by pressing ENT. If wrongly keyed in the point codecan be overwritten without having to clear the wronglychosen one with the CL-key.

There are however some occasions where operators are veryexperienced and have been working with only numericPcodes on field cards for years. On this occasion the Pcodeswitch can be switched off. The instrument will always adoptthe last chosen ON/OFF mode at switch on. The status of theswitch can also be seen when keying in one´s first point codenumber in a U.D.S, i.e. if the point code's equivalent alphatitle is seen in the display after keying in the numeric codeand pressing ENT, then the switch is set to ON.

Note!In order to correct any wrongly keyed in point code alphatitle, so that it corresponds with its numerical point codevalue, it is necessary to recreate it with the help of Pcode.

The changing and deletion of wrongly keyed in data and theinsertion of a new can of course be carried out with EDIT, ifyou have access to this software in the instrument.

Menu 16 - Switches

MNU 16In general Set 10:16

Targ.test on?AIM/REG off?Pcode on?

Note ! ☛

4.1.26

PRG

45


Auto dup, auto incr/decr label typesWhen using the Auto dup/auto incr/decr feature with Pcodesin U.D.S's, wrongly keyed in values can be changed withoutthe prompt and its respective value being duplicated in therecording device. This is done by using the F4 function; thisfunction must of course be used before pressing the REGkey. In cases where ordinary Dup and incr/decr label typesare used, use of F4 function will result in the Prompt and itsrespective data being added to the already in-buffer memoryrecorded data. In other words, the point code data will beduplicated. This can of course be erased and corrected withEDIT later, if you have access to that particulary software.This of course applies to all data which has been wronglyrecorded while using the Auto dup, Incr/Decr in theconnected recording device. So even if you have pressed theREG key, it is never to late to erase and/or change andcorrect wrongly recorded point code data. Correction ofwrong and entry of new Pno and SH values can be treated inthe same manner.

In general

4.1.27

PRG

45


How to useSwitch on the instrument and go through the Start procedureuntil the instrument is in theodolite mode.

The instrument’s station has beenestablished. Select program 45(Pcode).

Choose the numerical value of thepcode to which you wish to give analpha title. In this example we choose1 and press ENT.

The instrument adopts the ASCIImode, key in the complete alpha titleor abbreviated alpha title of the pointcode. In the example we key in 87 6576 76=W A L L (see the ASCII table).

Continue to create your Pcode libraryin this way until you have stored allthe alpha titles you need. When youare finished, press ENT to return toP0.

STD P0 10:16HA=392.9095VA=102.8955

P45 10:17Pcode=_

P45 10:16Pcode=2

P45 10:17Pcode=Text=ASCII=

PRG 45

ENT

ENT

1

How touse

4.1.28

PRG

45


Pcode in U.D.S and other programsYou have now stored, in the memory of the instrument, thenecessary alpha titles of most types of survey detail yourequire to survey in during your tacheometric task. As soonas you have established your instrument over the surveystation at which the survey measurements shall be carried outyou can take advantage of the alpha and alpha-numericalPcodes stored in your Pcode library. When in the U.D.S, thesequence prompts for the point code corresponding to thetype of survey detail which is to be measured and stored, allyou do is key in the relevant Pcode's numerical value. Afterits display, confirmation of its correctness is done by pressingENT on the instrument keyboard. Storage into Geodat or anyother external device is finalized by pressing the REG key ofthe instrument after the point has been measured.Note!If using a Geodat or an external memory device, the numericvalue of the point code is stored, not the title.

Pcode can be entered directly in the following programs:

How touse

Note ! ☛

Program 45Pcode

Program 23SetOut

Program 22Angle Meas

Program 24RefLine

Program 29RoadLine

U.D.S.

4.2.1

MNU

2

EDIT&VIEW CHAPTER 2 EDIT

EditHow to use

StartupViewEditDirectory

ExamplesChange data/Replace with new dataFind and Change dataDelete/InsertChanging from one file to anotherClear memory

View

4.2.24.2.34.2.34.2.44.2.54.2.64.2.74.2.74.2.94.2.124.2.164.2.17

4.2.18

Chapter 2

Edit & View

4.2.2

MNU

2


Imem Area 14:50

Area=6Beg End <-- -->

With EDIT installed in your Geodimeter, it is possible tocarry out editing of the data within the recording device,External memory or Geodat, directly from the keyboard ofthe Geodimeter instrument. Viewing of the data, beforeediting, can be done with the help of VIEW, which is auto-matically included in EDIT software additional option.

You can step through files, search for, delete, insert andchange data. EDIT is selected directly from the main menu ofthe instrument, option 2 - EDITOR. This option is directlylinked to a sub-menu which allows you to edit data in eitherthe external memory (Geodat) or the internal memory. Theediting features of this software option are menu driven withthe command options show on the bottom line of the dis-play, which are in turn directly placed above the relevantoperating key of the small keyboard.The various operations are selected by pressing the relevantkey. The keyboard is reconfigured to the actual chosen modeand when the bottom line is not visible, the key continues tooperate with its original function.

MNU

2

In general

In general

4.2.3

MNU

2


The program consists of three modes of operation, each withits own menu. The modes are 1 View, 2 Edit and 3Directory.To enter the editor, follow the instructions below.

Enter the program via menu 2.

In which memory unit do you wantto work, 2-the internal memory or 1-an external memory.

You are now displayed the remainingmemory capacity (total number of Kbytes free). Press ENT to stepfurther.

STD P0 11:41HA: 41.9087VA: 23.9876

Memory 11:411 Xmem2 Imem

Imem Area 11:41

31.675 Kby free

See next page

Startup

2

2

MNU

ENT

How to use

MNU

2

Howto use

4.2.4

MNU

2


ViewIn this mode you can select which file you want to view.Here you can also use the view functions to step forward orbackwards in the file.

BegJump to the beginning of the file.

EndJump to the end of the file.

<- -Step to the previous line in the file.

- ->Step to the next line in the file.

Note - arrowkeysIf the arrowkey is held depressed you will automatically stepto the next / previous line without having to press the keyrepeatedly.

Press this key to step to the next mode = EDIT.

Press this key to return to the main menu.

Viewmode

Imem Area 14:50

Area=6Beg End <-- -->

Note! ☛

<-- Current memory unit and file type

<-- Current file number<-- Command line

ENT

MNU

4.2.5

MNU

2


In this mode you can find, change, insert and delete data inthe file you have chosen.

DelDelete current label and prompt or complete file.Deletion of complete files can be executed when the promptis a filename e.g. Job No. To avoid accidental file deletion a"yes/no" prompt must be answered.

InsInsert a label and prompt in front of the one displayed.

ChgChange data relating to displayed label.

FindSearch for label or label and prompt.When the data value for a prompt is keyed in, the firstprompt with that value is displayed.

Edit

Editmode

Imem Area 14:50

Area=6Del Ins Chg Find

Press this key to go to the next mode =DIRECTORY

Press this key to return to the main menu

ENT

MNU



4.2.6

MNU

2


DirectoryIn this mode you can select what type of file you want toview, Area- or Job-file.

Dir: Switch between the Job and the Area file directory

<--: Show name of the file followingthe one now displayed

-->: Show name of the file in front ofthe one now displayed

Exit: Exit to the main menu

Note - arrowkeysIf the arrowkey is held depressed you will automaticallyincrease/decrease the file number without having to press thekey repeatedly.

Directorymode

Imem Area 14:50

Area=6Dir <- -> Exit

Note! ☛

Press this key to go to the next mode = VIEWIf the current file is not visible in the display aprompt for change to file ? is seen. In the case ofanswering YES the old file is closed and the new isopened. Answering NO will lead you back to VIEWwithout file change.

Press this key to return to the main menu

ENT

MNU



4.2.7

MNU

2


In order to fully appreciate the operating flexibility of EDIT,we will now run through a few examples. It is assumed thatbefore you start the editing examples you should prepare theinstrument as follows: Set up the instrument, connect Geodatand survey in a few points using one of your own speciallydesigned UDS´s and store them in Geodat. Instead of using aGeodat you can save the points in your internal memory anduse the internal memory instead of the external memory inthe example below.

Change data / Replace with new data

After registration of a point yourealise that the last SH of 0.8m forPno 17 was wrong. First follow thestartup instruction described on page4.2.3. In this example we choose theexternal memory.

As you know that it was the lastpoint you first press End to go to theend of the Jobfile. Then you can usethe <--=(REG-numeric keyboard orSTD-alfanumeric)to step back to thewrong SH.

Now press the ENT key to step to theEDIT mode.

See next page

UDS P10 16:05Step:1Pno=18

Xmem Job 16:05

Job no=1Beg End <-- -->

Xmem Job 16:05

SH=0.8Beg End <-- -->

See next page

MNU

REG

ENT

2

MNU

2

Examples

Examples

STD

4.2.8

MNU

2


See next page

Xmem Job 16:05

SH=0.8Del Ins Chg Find

Xmem Job 16:05

SH=0.5Beg End <-- -->

Change data / Replace with new data (cont.)

You are now in EDIT mode and youwant to change the SH value from0.8m to 0.5m. Press therefore theCHG key =(REG-numeric keyboardor STD-alfanumeric).

Key in 0.5 to overwrite the wronglystored value of 0.8 and accept withENT. Press only ENT if no change isto be made.

In order to see that the changed SHvalue has been stored in the correctplace use the arrowkeys.

Press MNU twice to return to theUDS-sequence.

From previous page

REG

Change/Replace

STD

ENT0.5

MNU MNU

UDS P10 16:05Step:1Pno=18

Xmem Job 16:05Change: SHData = .8

4.2.9

MNU

2


Find and Change data

Follow the startup instructiondescribed on page 4.2.3. In thisexample we choose the externalmemory.

You are now in the VIEW mode.Press ENT to go to the EDIT mode.

You wish to find the point No 204 tochange its SH to the correct value 1.7.Press the FIND key=(A/M-numerickeyboard, TRK-alfanumeric).

Note - FindIf wishing to find data try always tobe at the front (top) or back (end) ofthe data file before the search begins.If you go past a value and try to findit, an error will be given, i.e. INFO32.If wishing to find data which belongsto one particular label, the findroutine will jump consecutivelythrough the file from that particularlabel No. to the next one, jumpingthe other labels in between.

See next page

STD P0 17:55HA: 355.3245VA: 101.4252

Xmem Job 16:05


Xmem Job 16:05

Job no=12Del Ins Chg Find

See next page

MNU

ENT

A/M

2

Find andChange

TRKNote! ☛

4.2.10

MNU

2


Find and Change data (cont.)

In order to first find the point No youfirst have to choose the label No forPno. Key in 5 and ENT.

Here the Pno is being asked for. Keyin 204 and ENT.

You know that in the UDS you areusing SH lies 2 steps after Pno 204.Press the --> key (A/M-numerickeyboard, TRK-alfanumeric) twice orkeep it depressed until SH is found.

In order to change the SH from .5 to1.7 press the CHG-key=(REG-numeric keyboard, STD-alfanumeric).

See next page

Xmem Job 16:05FindLabel=

Xmem Job 16:05Find: PnoData=_

Xmem Job 16:05

Pno=204Beg End <-- -->

From previous page

Xmem Job 16:05

SH=.5Beg End <-- -->

See next page

A/M

REG

Find andChange

STD

TRK

204 ENT

5 ENT

4.2.11

MNU

2


Find and Change data (cont.)

Overwrite the shown data. Key in 1.7and ENT.

The correct SH is now stored in thememory device.

Press MNU twice to return to thetheodolite mode.

Xmem Job 16:05Change: SHData=.5

Xmem Job 16:05

SH=1.7Beg End <-- -->

From previous page

1.7

Find andChange

MNU MNU

STD P0 16:05HA: 355.3245VA: 101.4252

4.2.12

MNU

2


Delete / Insert

Follow the startup instructiondescribed on page 4.2.3. In thisexample we choose the externalmemory.

Your general data lies at thebeginning of your Job data file, soyou need only use to depress -->until you come to DATE=1993.0506

You wish to delete this completelyand replace it with time. Press ENTto step to the EDIT mode.

See next page

STD P0 17:55HA: 355.3245VA: 101.4252

Xmem Job 16:05


Xmem Job 16:05

Date=1993.0506Beg End <-- -->

See next page

MNU

A/M

ENT

2

Delete/Insert

TRK

4.2.13

MNU

2


Delete / Insert (cont.)

Now delete Date by pressing DEL.

Your next prompt is now displayed.Return to the EDIT mode by pressingENT.

Now insert in front of Stn=101. PressINS.

You shall insert time first. Label No.for time is 52. Key in 52 and ENT.

See next page

Xmem Job 16:05

Date=1993.0506Del Ins Chg Find

Xmem Job 16:05

Stn=101Beg End <-- -->

Xmem Job 16:05

Stn=101Del Ins Chg Find

From previous page

Xmem Job 16:05InsertLabel=_

See next page

ENT

56

Delete/Insert

4.2.14

MNU

2



The temp. which you wish to recordwas the temp. at the time of theactual measurements. Key in 16.05and ENT.

To check that the inserted time datahas been inserted into the correctplace press the arrow keys.

Make shure you have Stn=101 indisplay before inserting the pressurelabel. Then press ENT to step to theEDIT mode.

Now choose the Ins function to insertthe missing pressure data. Press Ins.

See next page

Xmem Job 16:05Insert:TimeData=_

Xmem Job 16:05

Time=16.05Beg End <-- -->

Xmem Job 16:05

Stn=101Beg End <-- -->

From previous page

Xmem Job 16:05

Stn=101Del Ins Chg Find

See next page

ENT

REG

16.05

Delete/Insert

TRK

4.2.15

MNU

2



The label No. for pressure is 74. Keyin 74 and ENT.

The pressure at the time of themeasurements was 755 mmHg. Keyin 755 and ENT.

Temp. and Pressure values are nowstored in the memory device beforeStn.name in the Job no file. Use thearrowkeys to check the position ofthe prompts and their values.

See next page

Xmem Job 16:05InsertLabel=_

Xmem Job 16:05Insert: PressData=755

Xmem Job 16:05

Press=755Beg End <-- -->

From previous page

755

74

Delete/Insert

4.2.16

MNU

2


Changing from one file to another

Follow the startup instruction described on page 4.2.3. Inthis example we choose the external memory. Then enter theDIRECTORY mode.

Here you can page through your Job/Area files. At the moment you are inthe Job file directory. Press <- or -> topage through your list of stored Jobfiles.

When you come to the next Job Nofile you are looking for, press ENT.

Is this the file to which you want tochange? Answer YES or NO toconfirm. Press YES.

You are now in the VIEW mode atthe top (beginning) of Job file No. 13.Press ENT if you want to EDIT oruse the arrowkeys to view the file.

The above example can of course be done with Area files ifyou had pressed the Area option in the first display shownon this page.

See next page

Xmem Job 16:05

Job no=12Dir <- -> Exit

Xmem Job 16:05


Xmem Job 16:05Change to this?Job no=13

Xmem Job 16:05


ENT

YES

Changefile

4.2.17

MNU

2


Clear memory

Follow the startup instruction described on page 4.2.3. Inthis example we choose the external memory. Then enter theEDIT mode.

In order to delete Job no 13 from thememory press DEL.

Here you have a chance to changeyour mind about total erasure of thefile. Press YES or NO.

Job no 13 is now deleted from thememory.

See next page

Xmem Job 16:05

Job no=13Del Ins Chg Find

Xmem Job 16:05

Are you sure?

Xmem Job 16:05


YES

Clearmemory

4.2.18

MNU

2


View enables you to retrieve and check data stored in eitherthe external memory (Geodat) and / or the internal memoryof Geodimeter. Checking of data is limited to the Job No. filein which you are presently working. To view Job files otherthan the one in which you are presently working, seeDirectory, page 4.2.6.

The program consists of two modes of operation, 1 Viewand 2 Directory, which are described on page 4.2.4 and4.2.6. To step between the two modes use the ENT-key.To start the program follow the startup instruction on page4.2.3.

MNU

2

View

VIEW

View

4.3.1

PRG

20

PROGRAM 20 - STATION ESTABLISHMENTFIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

4.3.2How to use 4.3.6

Known Station 4.3.6Known Station+ 4.3.12Free Station 4.3.23Point list 4.3.32Configuration 4.3.38

4.3.41

4.3.48

4.3.56How to use 4.3.58

Countdown to zero method 4.3.61Radial/Right angle offset 4.3.63

4.3.65How to use 4.3.67

Known Line 4.3.68Unknown Line 4.3.70Measure 4.3.73Setout with Radofs/RT.ofs 4.3.76Setout with coordinates 4.3.80

4.3.84

4.3.91

4.3.100

4.3.107

4.3.134

4.3.228

4.3.243

4.3.307

4.3.331

4.3.335

4.3.341

Field Calculations Chapter 3Station Establishment - P20

Z/IZ - P21

Angle Meas - P22

SetOut - P23

RefLine - P24

Area Calc - P25

DistOb - P26

Obstructed Point - P28

RoadLine - P29

RoadLine3D - P39

MCF (Moving Coordinates Forward) - P27

COGO - P61

AngleMeas Plus - P32

Athletics - P60

Measure Coordinates - P30

Robotic Lite - P33

4.3.2

PRG

20


Station Establishment (P20) is a basic software package forall Geodimeter System 400/500/600/4000 field calculationprograms. This program is used to calculate and store instru-ment setup data which is required for some of the field calc.programs. The programs that follow P20 today are SetOut,RoadLine and RefLine (see Fig. 3.5). If you try to activateany of these programs without first establishing your station,you are taken directly to P20.

In general

Station Establishment - In general

Program 20 Station EstablishmentThe program is divided into three main functions:

1. Known station – for station establishment when thecoordinates of your station pointand reference object are known.

2. Free station – for free station establishment using2-10 points whose coordinates areknown.

3. Known station+ – for station establishment when thecoordinates of your station point andup to ten reference objects are known.



Program 24RefLine

Program 23SetOut

Fig. 3.5. Station establishment is necessary for running the above programs

Program 20 Station Establishment

PRG

20

4.3.3

PRG

20


1&3 Known StationWhen establishing a station at a known point, you will onlyneed the point numbers for your station point and referenceobject. The instrument will then calculate bearing and dis-tance automatically. To increase the accuracy of the bearinga new routine called "Known Station+" has beenimplemented in the instrument. By using this function youcan measure to up to ten reference objects and also obtain astandard deviation (S_dev). See more about this routine onpage 4.3.12.When running Known Station in P20, you decide whether ornot elevations are to be used in other calculation programs.Here you also indicate in what Job file station data andpossibly other data to be calculated later will be stored, andin what Area file the coordinates are stored.See on page 4.3.22 what is stored in the selected Job filewhen a Known Station has been established.

PreparationsBefore station establishment can take place, the coordinatesand point numbers must be stored in an Area file — either inthe internal memory or in an external memory such as CardMemory or Geodat — using P43 (Enter Coordinates) ordownloaded from a computer. These coordinates are thenused in P20 when you retrieve the correct Area file and Pno.

You choose free station establishment when the station pointis unknown — that is, N, E and possibly ELE will have to becalculated. This function allows free establishment in whichseveral different combinations of objects, angles anddistances can be used. The calculation is a combination ofresectioning and triangulation. If you make severalmeasurements, you obtain not only the mean value but alsothe standard deviation (S_dev). The calculation is doneaccording to the least square adjustment method. If good

2. Free Station

In general

4.3.4

PRG

20


1101

Fig. 3.6 Free station establishment

results are to be obtained using this method, it is importantthat the traverses and networks are of high quality. For thisreason we have provided the Free Station routine with afunction called Config. (configuration). This allows you touse factors such as the scale factor (stored under label = 43),weight factors to weight your points with regard to thedistance from your free station to the known point (usedmainly in Germany), and also to create a point list in whichall measured data for each individual measured point can bemade available for editing and possible recalculation. In theexample on page 4.3.24 we have chosen not to use Config.but to treat it separately on page 4.3.38.Free station establishment can be done with a large numberof different combinations of points, angles, and distances(see Fig. 3.6)With free station establishment using 3-10 known points, thefollowing combinations are possible:1. Angles and distances2. Only angles. But note that three points alone will notprovide enough data to be able to calculate an optimalsolution — that is, they will not give a standard deviation.

1101

Note ! ☛If only 3anglesare used,try toestablishwithinthe”triangle”in orderto avoidthe”dangerouscircle”.

Stn.

In general

1102

1103

1104

4.3.5

PRG

20


1101

Point diff Ok?

In free station establishment with two known points, thefollowing is valid:1. Angles and distances.

1101

Fig. 3.7. Free station establishment with 2 known points

In general

1102

4.3.6

PRG

20


The examples that follow deal with three kinds of stationestablishment: Known Station, Known Station+ and FreeStation. It is assumed that you are familiar with the opera-tion of your Geodimeter instrument.Switch on the instrument and go step by step through pro-gram 0 until you are in theodolite position — that is, HAand VA are shown on the display.

PRG

20

How touse

How to use

1

PRG

20

ENT

N.B. ☛An exam-ple of freestationestablish-mentis foundon page4.3.24.

See next page

The instrument is now in theodoliteposition. Select P20 (StationEstablishment).

In this first example we will establisha station with a known point andreference object. These are stored asPno and coordinates in an Area file,using P43 (Enter Coordinates). Pno1101 is our station point and Pno1102 is our reference object, as in theexample on page 4.3.7.Now we will select option 1, KnownStation.

STD P0 10:16HA: 234.5678VA: 92.5545

Stn.estab 10:161 Known station2 Free station3 Known station+

1 Known station

4.3.7

PRG

20


1101

Fig 3.8. Station establishment with a known station and one reference object

1101

1102

4.3.8

PRG

20


2

ENT

1

ENT

1101

ENT

Station establishment with a known station

See next page

Here you key in the number or nameof the Job file in which you wish tostore data from your stationestablishment. A list of data stored inthe selected Job file can be seen onpage 4.3.22. Select, for example, Jobno = 2.

Where will you store your Job file?Choose a suitable memory unit byindicating 1, 2 or 3 for activation/deactivation. Then press ENT. Herewe have chosen to work with theinternal memory.

Key in your station number.

Key in the name of the Area file inwhich you have stored your stationpoint and your reference object.If you leave the line blank you areable to enter the coordinatesmanually.

P20 10:16

Job no=_

P20 10:171:Imem off2:Xmem off3:Serial off

P20 10:17

Stn=_

P20 10:17

Area=_

Known Stn.

Note ! ☛See noteon 4.3.26.

4.3.9

PRG

20


ENT

ENT

From previous page

Known Stn. In which memory unit is the Area filestored? In this example we are usingthe internal memory (Imem).

Enter the coordinates manuallyEnter your station coordinates. Leavethe ELE blank for no heightestablishment. (This display will onlyappear if you have left the Area fileline blank.

Are your coordinates correct? PressYes (ENT) to accept them. If youpress NO you will return to thequestion about STN= and Area=. Ifthe coordinates have to be changed,use Edit or P43 (Enter Coordinates).In this example we will continue byaccepting them.

Are you going to measure heights?Accept this question by pressing ENT(Yes). If you decide not to measureheights (press No) it means that theinstrument height (IH) and signalheight (SH) will be ignored.In this example, we will be measuringheights. Press ENT.

See next page

Coord 10:17N=xxxxE=xxxxELE=xx

Stn ok? 10:17N=xxxxE=xxxxELE=xx

Note ! ☛Enter thecoordi-natesmanually.

10:17

HT measure?

Note ! ☛Onlyshown ifyourcoordi-natesincludesELE.

Sel device10:171 Xmem2 Imem

2

1 ENT ENT

4.3.10

PRG

20


ENT

ENT1.75

ENT1102

ENT1

From previous page

This is your old station groundelevation. Press ENT (Yes) if youwant to replace the old elevation withthe new or press NO to cancel it. Inthis example we press ENT.(This display will only appear if theground elevation has already beendetermined).

Enter your instrument height (IH).For example, 1.75.

Key in the Pno of your referenceobject. For example, 1102.

Key in the name of the Area file inwhich you have stored your referenceobject. If you leave the line blank youwill have the opportunity to enter thecoordinates manually in the sameway as for the station coordinates.

Are your coordinates correct? PressENT to accept them. If you press NOyou return to the question Refobj=. Ifthey have to be changed, use Edit orP43 (Enter Coordinates). We willcontinue by accepting them.

10:18ELE= x.xxxReplace Z?

10:18

IH=

Ref ok ?N=xxxxE=xxxxELE =xx



10:18

Refobj=

10:18

Area=

Known Stn.

4.3.11

PRG

20


ENT

A/M

ENT

A/M

REG

From previous page

Aim at your reference object. Thenpress the A/M key.

HAref is the calculated bearingbetween the station point and thereference point.If you wish to check the distance tothe reference object, press ENT.Otherwise press REG to store thestation establishment.

If the reference object is marked witha reflector, you can also check thehorizontal distance by pressing theA/M key.Otherwise press REG to store thestation establishment.

Here you can compare the calculateddistance with the actual measureddistance. Press REG to store stationestablishment in the Job file you havechosen (see page 4.3.22).Note !The REG key must always be used ifyou want to store the stationestablishment.

10:18

Aim to refobj.Press A/M

STD P20 10:18HA ref: xx.xxxxHA: : xx.xxxxReg=Exit

STD P20 10:18SHD: xxx.xxxHD :Reg=Exit

STD P20 10:19SHD: xxx.xxxHD : xxx.xxxReg=ExitNote ! ☛

PRESSREG

Known Stn.

4.3.12

PRG

20


Note ! ☛Anexampleof freestationestablish-ment isfound onpage4.3.24

See next page.

STD P0 10:16HA: 234.5678VA: 92.5545

Stn.estab 10:161.Known Station2.Free Station3.Known Station+

The instrument is now in theodoliteposition. Select P20 (StationEstablishment).

In this first example we will establisha station with a known point andreference objects. These are stored asPno and coordinates in an Area file,using P43 (Enter Coordinates). Pno1101 is our station point and Pno1102, 1103 and 1104 are ourreference objects, as in the exampleon page 4.3.13.Now we will select function 3,Known Station+.

PRG

20

ENT

3

3 Known station+ (known station with 1-10 reference objects)

4.3.13

PRG

20


1101

1101

1102

Fig 3.9. Station establishment with a known station and 1-10 reference objects

1103

1104

4.3.14

PRG

20


Station establishment with Known station+

See next page.

Here you key in the number or nameof the Job file in which you wish tostore data from your stationestablishment. A list of data stored inthe selected Job file can be seen onpage 4.3.22. Select, for example, Jobno = 2.



Key in the name of the Area file inwhich you have stored your stationpoint and your reference object.If you leave the line blank you areable to enter the coordinates manu-ally.

P20 10:16

Job no =

P20 10:171. Xmem off2. Imem off3. Serial off

P20 10:17

Stn =

P20 10:17

Area =

2

2

ENT

ENT

1101

ENT

Known stn+

4.3.15

PRG

20


See next page.

In which memory unit is your Areafile stored? In our example, we areusing the internal memory (Imem).

Enter the coordinates manually

Enter your station coordinates.Leave the ELE blank for no heightestablishment.

Are your coordinates correct? PressYes (ENT) to accept them. If youpress No you will return to thequestion about Stn= and Area=. If thecoordinates have to be changed, useEdit or P43 (Enter Coordinates). Inthis example we will continue byaccepting them.

Are you going to measure heights?Accept this question by pressing ENT(Yes). If you decide not to measureheights (press No) it means that theinstrument height (IH) and signalheight (SH) will be ignored.In this example, we will be measuringheights. Press YES.


Stn ok ?N=xxxxE=xxxxELE=xx

10:17

HT measure ?

YES

Note ! ☛Onlyshown ifyourcoordinatesincludesELE.

1 ENT


ENT

2

From previous page

From previouspage

Note ! ☛Enter thecoordi-natesmanually

Known stn+

4.3.16

PRG

20


From previous page.

10:18ELE= x.xxxReplace Z?

YES

This is your old station groundelevation.Press YES (ENT) if you want toreplace the old elevation with the newor press NO to cancel it. In thisexample we press YES.(This display will only appear if theground elevation has already beendetermined).




Are your coordinates correct? PressYES to accept them. If you press Noyou return to the question Refobj=. Ifthey have to be changed, use Edit orP43 (Enter Coordinates). We willcontinue by accepting them.

Note ! ☛

Onlyshown ifyourcoordinatesincludesELE.

Note ! ☛


YES

10:18

IH =

1.75 ENT

Pno =

1102 ENT


ENT

Area =

1

Known stn+

4.3.17

PRG

20


From previous page

Enter the signal height (SH) and pressENT

The instrument is now in theodoliteposition and is ready to measure. Aimat the chosen target. Press the A/Mkey if distance is to be measured,otherwise REG.

The instrument displays HA, VA andSD for your first point. Yourmeasurement can now be registered.Press the REG key.

Here the difference between measuredand theoretical horizontal distance(HD) is shown. Press YES to acceptor NO to redo the measurement orselect another reference point.

10:18

SH: 0.000_

STD P20 10:18*HA:xxx.xxxxVA:xxx.xxxx

STD P20 10:18*HA:xxx.xxxxVA:xxx.xxxxSD:xxx.xxx

ResultDiff HD: -0.003

Ref ok?

ENT

A/M

REG

YES

Note ! ☛Diff HDis shownonly ifdistancehas beenmeasured

YES

Note ! ☛Onlyshown ifheightshould bedetermined

Known stn+

4.3.18

PRG

20


From previous page

Are you going to use more points foryour station establishment, or are yousatisfied with only one? In ourexample we will measure and registertwo more points (maximum number= 10). Press YES.

Enter the next Pno to be used foryour known station (the display hereshows the most recently used Pno).Then press ENT.

Note!The points selected for your stationestablishment can be measured inany order.

Are your coordinates correct? PressYES or NO. If they have to bechanged, use Edit or P43 (EnterCoordinates). In this case, we’llanswer YES.

Enter the signal height (SH). In thiscase 1 and press ENT.

10:19

more?

10:19

Pno = xxxx

Ref ok?N=xxxx.xxxE=xxxx.xxxELE=xxx.xxx

10:20

SH=0.000

YES

ENT

YES

1

Note ! ☛Onlyshown ifyourcoordinatesincludeELE.

ENT

Note ! ☛

Known stn+

4.3.19

PRG

20


From previous page

Aim towards your target, then pressthe A/M key to measure.

The instrument has now measuredangles and distance to the secondpoint of your known stationestablishment. Press REG to registeryour measured data.

Diff HD is the difference betweenmeasured and theoretical horizontaldistance to the second point. Diff HAis the difference between theoreticaland measured angle between point 1and 2.Press YES to accept or NO toredo the measurement.Note! If more than 2 points havebeen measured, Diff HA will bereplaced by S_dev HA, i.e the stan-dard deviation of the horizontalangles.

Are you going to use more points foryour station establishment, or are yousatisfied with two? In our examplewe will measure and register onemore point (maximum number = 10).Press Yes.

STD 10:20*HA:xxx.xxxxVA:xxx.xxxx

STD 10:20*HA:xxx.xxxxVA:xxx.xxxxSD:xx.xxx

ResultDiff HD:0.003Diff HA:0.0032Ref ok?

STD 10:21

more?

A/M

REG

YES

YES

Note! ☛

Note! ☛If you areusing aservoinstru-mentpress the key topositionto point2-10.Fineadjustmanually.

Known stn+

4.3.20

PRG

20


From previous page.

Key in the third point to be used, andrepeat the procedure described above.In this example, we have measuredand stored a total of three pointswhose coordinates are known for ourknown station.Assuming that these have been mea-sured and registered, let us continuedirectly to the question ”more?” afterstoring the last point.

All points to be used for our knownstation establishment are now stored.Answer ”more?” with NO. The pro-gram immediately calculates yourstation coordinates.

Now you're taken to the Select menu.Here you can choose to either exitP20, edit the point list, recalculate thepoint data or add more points. (Youcan switch between the two pages bypressing the ENT button).In thisexample we choose to edit the pointlist. Press 2.

10:22

Pno =

STD 10:22

more?

NO

Note! ☛If you areusing aservoinstru-mentpress the key topositionto point2-10.Fineadjustmanually.

Select 10:221 Exit2 Point list3 Recalc

Select 10:224 Add point

ENT

2

Known stn+

4.3.21

PRG

20


From previous page.

Here you can choose which pointsyou want to use in the point list.Choose On, Off or Delete by pres-sing the NO button, then accept withENT.

When you have choosen your pointsfor the point list and accepted withENT, calculation automatically startsand the result is shown in the display.Press ENT to exit to the Select menu.

Now you're taken back to the Selectmenu. Here you can choose to eitherexit P20, edit the point list onceagain, recalculate the point data (i.ese the result once again) or add morepoints.

(Switch between the pages withENT).

Press 4 if you want to add points toimprove the result. In this examplewe're satisfied with the result. Press 1to exit P20.Note that the current instrumentdirection is stored as HA_ref.

On?Pno: xxDiff HD: -x.xxxDiff HA: x.xxxx

ResultList:3 Used:3S_dev HA:x.xxxxPress ENT

ENT

Select 10:231 Exit2 Point list3 Recalc

Select 10:234 Add point

ENT

1

ENT

Known stn+

4.3.22

PRG

20


Store dataKnown Stn

Job File (1 ref point) Job File (2-10 ref points)

Job FileStn 2Stn Coordinates 37,38,(39)RefObj 62RefObj Coords 37,38,(39)HA_ref* 21HD 11IH 3

Stn 2Stn Coordinates 37,38,(39)RefObj 5SH 6RefObj Coords 37,38,(39)Raw data 7,8,(9)Weight =s/1 if OFF 0Info: Diff HA or S_dev HA 0Info: Point list 0RefObj 5Delta HD (if available) 76Delta HA 45Stn 2Stn Coordinates 37,38,(39)RefObj=Blank 62RefObj Coords=0.000 37,38,(39)HA_ref* 21HD=0 11IH 3

Here are the data that can be stored in the Job file you have choosen.

* HA_ref for Known Station = calculated and Set HA, HA_ref for Known Station+ = Current instrument direction when exiting P20.

4.3.23

PRG

20


1101

1108

1105

Fig 3.10. Free station establishment

1106

FreeStn.

1107

4.3.24

PRG

20


Free station establishment

See next page.

Stn estab.10:191.Known Station2.Free Station3.Known Station+

P20 10:19

Job no =


Select Program 20.

In this example, we will establish afree station. The known points wewill be using have been stored as Pnoand coordinates in an Area file usingP43 (Enter Coordinates).We’ll choose function 2, Free Station.

Here you key in the number or nameof the Job file in which you wish tostore data from your stationestablishment. A list of data stored inthe selected Job file can be seen onpages 4.3.35, 37. Select, for example,Job no = 20.

Where will you store your Job file?Choose a suitable memory unit byindicating 1, 2 or 3 for activation/deactivation. Then press ENT.

PRG 20

ENT

20

ENT

2

ENT2

Free stn

4.3.25

PRG

20


P20 10:20

Stn =

From previous page

ENT

Free stn

Here you enter a name/number foryour free station. You decide this foryourself.

Are you going to measure heights?Accept this question by pressing YES(ENT). If you decide not to measureheights (press No) it means that theinstrument height (IH) and signalheight (SH) will be ignored. In thisexample, we will be measuringheights. Press YES.

2ENT

P20 10:20

HT Measure?

YES

See next page.

4.3.26

PRG

20


Enter your instrument height (IH).For example 1.75

Key in the name of the Area file inwhich you have stored your knownPno and coordinates. Then pressENT.


Note !If you get Info 32 when selecting amemory unit, it may be due to one ofthe following:1. You have chosen the wrongmemory unit.2. The Area file you are looking for isnot located in the memory you haveselected.3. The Stn (Pno) which you arelooking for is not stored in the Areafile you have selected.The program will then return to thequestion ”Area =" so that you canenter another Area file number orpoint number.

From previous page.

See next page.

P20 10:20

Area =

P20 10:20

IH=0.000

Sel device10:201. Xmem2. Imem

2

1.75

ENT

ENT

Note ! ☛Info 32

Free stnNote ! ☛

Onlyshown ifheightshould bedetermined.

4.3.27

PRG

20


Enter the number of the first pointyou want to aim at. Then press ENT.

Are your coordinates correct? PressYES (ENT) to accept them. If theyhave to be changed, use Edit or P43(Enter Coordinates). In this examplewe will continue by accepting them.

Enter the signal height (SH).For example 2.1 and press ENT.

10:21

Pno =

Pno ok?N = xxxxx.xxxE = xxxxx.xxxELE = xxx.xx

10:21

SH = 0.000

From previous page.

See next page

ENT

YES

2.1

ENT

Free stn

Note ! ☛Onlyshown ifheightshould bedetermined.

4.3.28

PRG

20


From previous page.

See next page.

STD 10:21*HA:xxx.xxxVA:xxx.xxx

STD 10:21*HA:xxx.xxxVA:xxx.xxxSD:xxx.xx

The instrument is now in theodoliteposition and is ready to measure. Aimat the chosen target. Press the A/Mkey if distance is to be measured,otherwise REG.

Note !Distance measurement must becarried out when measuring heights.


Enter the next Pno to be used foryour free station (the display hereshows the most recently used Pno).Then press ENT.

Note !The points selected for your stationestablishment can be measured in anyorder.

10:21

Pno =xxxx

Note !☛

Note! ☛

A/M

REG

ENT

Free stn

4.3.29

PRG

20


Are your coordinates correct? PressYES or NO. If they have to bechanged, use Edit or P43 (EnterCoordinates). In this case, we’llanswer YES.

Enter the signal height (SH). In thiscase 3 and press ENT.

Aim at your target. Then press theA/M key to measure distance.

The instrument has now measuredangles and distance to the secondpoint of your free station establish-ment. Your measured data can nowbe registered.

STD 10:21*HA:xxx.xxxVA:xxx.xxx

STD 10:21*HA:xxx.xxxVA:xxx.xxxSD:xx.xx

10:21

SH=0.000

See next page.

Pno ok?N=xxxxE=xxxxELE=xxx

YES

ENT

A/M

REG

3

Free stn

Note ! ☛

Onlyshown ifyourcoordi-natesincludeELE.

4.3.30

PRG

20


From previous page.

See next page.

Are you going to use more points foryour station establishment, or areyou satisfied with only two? Note! Ifcomplete measurements have beencarried out — that is, angles anddistances — two points will suffice.If, on the other hand, only angleshave been measured, at least threepoints are needed. This is not anoptimal solution, and the displaywarns you with the message ”NotOptimized”. In our example we willmeasure and register two more points(maximum number = 10). Press YES.

Key in the third point to be used, andrepeat the procedure described above.In this example, we have measuredand stored a total of four pointswhose coordinates are known for ourfree station.Assuming that these have been mea-sured and registered, let us continuedirectly to the question ”more?” afterstoring the last point.

All points to be used for our free sta-tion establishment are now stored.Answer ”more?” with NO. The pro-gram immediately calculates yourstation coordinates.

STD 10:21

more?

10:22

Pno =xxxx

STD 10:22

more?

YES

NO

Free stn

Note!If you areusing aservoinstru-mentpress the key topositionto point3-10.Fineadjustmanually.

4.3.31

PRG

20


From previous page.

See next page.

These are your new stationcoordinates plus any standard devia-tion there may be. To see the stan-dard deviation in N and E plus thescale factor used, switch the displayby pressing the ENT key.

This is the standard deviation in Nand E plus the scale factor used (scalefactor = 1.0000 if it is off.) PressENT.

Here is your calculated stationelevation shown if you have chosen tomeasure heights.Here you can also see the standarddeviation based on all observations. Ifthe standard deviation or differencein elevation (in the case of 2 points) isto large redo the measurement againwithout storing the actual.

Note !On the following pages we willdescribe how to use the point list. Seepage 4.3.36 if you have deactivatedthe point list.

STD 10:22N: xxxxx.xxxE: xxxxx.xxxS_dev: x.xxx

STD 10:22S_devX:xxx.xxxS_devY:xxx.xxxSF = 1.00000

STD 10:22ELE = xxx.xxxS_devZ= x.xxx

PointlistOFF, seepage4.3.36

ENT

ENT

ENT

Free stn

Note ! ☛

4.3.32

PRG

20


Free Stat.10:161. dev.2. RT.ofs/Radofs

Pno = 1Radofs=x.xxx onon=1 off=0

Pno = 1RT.ofs=x.xxx onon=1 off=0

STD 10:16Pno = 1Diff = x.xxx

How to use the point list

The point list allows you to look at,and deactivate, any deviations theremay be for each point. The deviationsare displayed as ”dev. =” (radialdeviation) and ”RT.ofs/Radofs”(right offset and radial offset). We’llselect point 1.

Here you can look at 1 (dev = radialdeviation). If there is a major radialdeviation, you can make a moredetailed analysis by selecting 2(RT.ofs/Radofs).

ENT

See next page.

In this example we will take a closer look at the point listwhich is obtained after you have established your free station(here we assume that the point list has been activated under”Config.”).

Free Stat.10:161. Pointlist2. Recalc.3. Exit

ENT

21

Here the radial error is displayedfor point no. 1. For an explanationof "dev", see page 4.3.39. Bypressing ENT you can check theradial errors for all the points.

How touse -PointlistON

This is the difference in distance betweenyour measured point and the theoreticalpoint, along the line of measurement. Aminus sign indicates that the measuredpoint lies beyond the theoretical point. Aplus sign indicates that it is ahead of thatpoint.

See next page.

This is the difference in distance —that is, how much to the left (- value)or right (+ value) your theoreticalpoint lies relative to your measuredpoint (see Fig. 3.11, page 4.3.39).Select activation/deactivation and thenpress ENT.

1

4.3.33

PRG

20



STD 10:16N: 61732.568E: 21806.327S_dev: 0.002

STD 10:16S_devX:S_devY:SF = 1.00000

See next page.

From previous page.From previous page.

After going through the point list andpossibly deactivating one or moreparameters of your points, you willhave to recalculate using thecoordinates you want for your freestation establishment. Do this byselecting function 2, Recalc.

These are your new stationcoordinates together with theresulting standard deviation in N andE. To see the standard deviation in Nand E plus the scale factor used,switch the display by pressing theENT key.

This is the standard deviation in Nand E plus the scale factor that hasbeen used (scale factor = 1.0000 if itis Off). Press ENT.

ENT

ENT

ENT


ENT

This page is shown for all pointsthat have 2 coordinates and onemeasured distance. Any one ofthese points can be used for cal-culation of the station height.The displayed value is the diffe-rence between the calculated average heightand the height, calculated from this point only.

2

Pno = 1dELE = XXX onon=1 Off=0

4.3.34

PRG

20


From previous page

Here is your calculated station ele-vation shown if you have chosen tomeasure heights.Here you can also see the standarddeviation based on all observations.If the standard deviation or differencein elevation (in the case of 2 points) isto large redo the measurement againwithout storing the actual.

Here you select function 3, Exit.

This is your old station groundelevation.Press YES (ENT) if you want toreplace the old elevation with the newor press No to cancel it. In thisexample we press YES.(This display will only appear if thestation ground elevation has alreadybeen determined).

Now the instrument is orientated.Do you want to store the point in anArea file answer this question withYES (ENT).Note that the current instrumentdirection is stored as HA_ref.


STD 10:16ELE= xxx.xxxReplace Z ?

STD 10:16

Store ?

STD 10:16ELE = xxxx.xxxS_devZ = x.xxx

ENT

YES

YES


3

See next page

4.3.35

PRG

20


P0 10:16

Area =


From previous page.

2

ENT

Store data

Key in the name of the Area file inwhich you want to store the point.Then press ENT.

In which memory unit is yourArea file to be stored? In ourexample we are using the internalmemory (Imem).

Job File Area File

Pno (Stn) 5N 37E 38S_dev 46ELE 39Info: S_dev_Z 0

* dHA=correction value ofthe calculated bearing(orientation), which isnormally a low figure.

Pno 5SH 6Coord 37,38,(39)Raw data 7,8,(9)Scale factor =1 if OFF 0Weight =s/1 if OFF 0dHA* 45S_dev 46Info: S_dev_Z 0Info=Point list 0Pno 5Used raw data (Ang, Dist, Height) 0dN 40dE 41dELE 42Stn no 2Stn coordinates 37,38,(39)RefObj= Blank 62RefObj coordinates=0.000 37,38,(39)HA_ref 21HD=0 11IH 3

Pointlist ON

Here are the data that can be stored in the Job or Area file you havechosen, if you have activated the point list in the configuration routine.

Note ! ☛Data thatcan bestored intheselectedJob orArea file.

{Note ! ☛Only ifPoint Listis on incon-figuration

4.3.36

PRG

20


Free stnPointlistOFF

This is your old station groundelevation.Press YES (ENT) if you want toreplace the old elevation with the newor press No to cancel it. In thisexample we press ENT. (This displaywill only appear if the ground eleva-tion has already been determined).

Now the instrument is orientated.Do you want to store the point in anArea file answer this question withYES (ENT).Note that the current instrumentdirection is stored as HA_ref.

Key in the name of the Area file inwhich you want to store the point.Then press ENT.

In which memory unit is your Areafile to be stored? In our example weare using the internal memory(Imem).

Note !See next page for a list over the datathat can be stored in the selected Jobor Area file.

10:21ELE = x.xxxReplace Z?

Store ?

P20 10:21

Area =


See next page

YES

YES

ENT

2

Note ! ☛

From page 4.3.31

4.3.37

PRG

20


From previous page

Note ! ☛

Data thatcan bestored intheselectedJob orArea file.

Store data

Here are the data that can be stored in the Job or Area file you havechosen, if you have deactivated the point list in the configuration routine.

Job File Area File

Pno (Stn) 5N 37E 38S_dev 46ELE 39Info: S_dev_Z 0

Pno 5SH 6Coord 37,38,(39)Raw data 7,8,(9)Scale factor =1 if OFF 0Weight =s/1 if OFF 0dHA* 45S_dev 46Info: S_dev_Z 0Stn no 2Stn coordinates 37,38,(39)RefObj= Blank 62RefObj coordinates=0.000 37,38,(39)HA_ref 21HD=0 11IH 3

* dHA=correction value of thecalculated bearing (orientation), whichis normally a low figure.

Pointlist OFF

4.3.38

PRG

20


P20 10:15

Scalefactor onon=1 off=0

1 ENT

How to use "Config." in Free StationIn this example, we will describe in greater detail the routinein the free station establishment program called ”Config.”.This option can only be accessed when starting the programwith a long press on the PRG-key, see page 4.2.

Press 1 to start the program or select2 to configurate the program. In thisexample we press 2. Config.

Press 1 Exit to return to the previousmenu or press 2 options to start theconfiguration. In this example wepress 2.

Here you are given an opportunity toactivate/deactivate a scale factor. Thescale factor for free station establish-ment is calculated and defined basedon the internal relation between yourknown points.The following applies for the scalefactor:– Scale factor = 1.0000 if it is not activated (Off).– If a UTM scale factor (F43) has been given, this value is multiplied by the scalefactor calculated for free station establishment.– The scale factor that has been used is displayed after calculation of your free station (see page 4.3.31).In this example, we will activate thescale factor.

How touse -Config

P20 10:151 Run2 Config

2

P20 10:151 Exit2 Options

2

See next page.

4.3.39

PRG

20


Radofs

RT.O

fs

NR

adia

l

Measurdpoint

Theoreticalpoint

Here you can activate/deactivate apoint list. In the list you will be ableto analyse and alter any deviationsfor each point. The deviations aredisplayed as ”dev” (radial deviation)and ”RT.ofs/Radofs” (right offsetand radial offset). See Fig. 3.11below.

Note !For a more detailed explanation ofhow to work with the point list, seepage 4.3.32.

From previous page..

See next page.

Fig. 3.11. Definition of deviations presented in the point list

P20 10:15

Pointlist onon=1 off=0

1

ENT

How touse -Config

dN

dE

4.3.40

PRG

20


By using a weight factor you can givepriority to your known points withreference to distance. To put itsimply, points that are further fromyour free station have a lower prioritythan the points that are closer. Thisfunction is used mostly in Germany.Normally no weight factor is usedwhen the network is of good quality.This means that you should choosethe weight factor that is defined ass/1.By pressing the ENT key in steps youcan produce three different bases ofcalculation for the weight factor (seethe margin, left). These are intendedmainly for Germany, and are notused otherwise. Since we will not beusing this function and since weightfactor s/1 is the default in positionON, you need press only ENT untilthe display shows...

Here you can choose to continue withyour free station establishment, orrepeat your configuration. If youcontinue with free stationestablishment, press 1 and thenchoose 1 Run to start the program.See page 4.3.24 for instructions.

Note ! ☛

From previous page.

P20 10:151 Exit2 Options

P20 10:15Weightfactors/1 onon=1 off=0

Formulasforcalculatingtheweightfactor(for theGermanmarket).

P20 10:15Weightfactor100/s offon=1 off=0

P20 10:15Weightfactor1000/s**3/2offon=1 off=0

P20 10:15Weightfactor1000/s**2 offon=1 off=0

100/S

1000/S

1000/S

3/2

2

How touse -Config

4.3.41

PRG

21

PROGRAM 21 - Z/IZFIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

Z/IZ is a program for calculating instrument elevation. It willprovide several results, such as the ground point elevation orthe instrument point elevation. These are obtained bymeasuring the vertical angle and length of slope to one ormore points of known height. This field calculation is alsocalled ”instrument point elevation resection”, as the meanheight and standard deviation are calculated from all theobservations.Z/IZ can be used in a number of applications. For example,it is naturally advantageous to combine Z/IZ and StationEstablishment /Free Station when having established yourstation point in only two dimensions (N and E). Bycombining these two programs, the three-dimensionalcoordinates of a point can be calculated and stored in thesame Area file and under the same point number in thememory unit you select. In such cases, free stationestablishment shall be carried out before measuring eleva-tion. Z/IZ also includes P43 (Enter Coordinates).

PRG

21

In general

Z/IZ - In general

Program 20 Station Establishment


Program 21Z/IZ

4.3.42

PRG

21


One application for which Z/IZ is ideal is to determine theheight of a point whose coordinates are known — that is, incombination with P20 (Free Station function). In the examplebelow, we have chosen to carry out this kind of measurementand calculation. It is assumed that you have already establishedyour station (P20, see page 4.3.2) and that the points whosecoordinates are known are stored in an Area file. However, P21can also be used independently for height calculation.

The instrument’s station has beenestablished. Select program 21 (Z/IZ).

Key in your station number and pressENT.

In what memory unit is your Area filestored? In this example, we are usingthe internal memory (Imem).

P0 10:16

Temp = 20.0

P21 10:17

Stn=1


PRG 21

ENT

1

2

PRG

21

How touse

How to use

ENT

4.3.43

PRG

21


From previous page.

Key in the number of the Area file inwhich we have stored the pointswhose coordinates are known, whichwe shall be using to determine theheight of our free station. In thisexample, these are located inArea = 2. If you leave the Area fileblank you will be able to manuallykey in point elevation later on.

Here you decide whether you want tomeasure instrument point elevation orground point elevation. If IH is given,the ground point elevation will becalculated. If no instrument height isgiven, the instrument point elevationwill be calculated. In this example,we assign IH = 1.7 m. Consequentlythe ground point elevation will becalculated.

IH = 1.7m

Give the point number for the firstreference point stored in the Area file.This display will not be shown if youhave left the Area file blank above.

STD P21 10:17

Area =

P21 10:17

IH =

SH = 1.0m

P21 10:17

Pno =

See next page.

Note ! ☛Important

Groundpointelevation

2

ENT

ENT

1.7

ENT

How touse

4.3.44

PRG

21


See next page.

From previous page.

STD P21 10:17

ELE =

P21 10:17

SH =

STD P21 10:17HA:xxx.xxxVA:xxx.xxx

STD P21 10:17*HA:xxx.xxxVA:xxx.xxxSD:xx.xxx

The elevation is shown for thereference point selected. If you leftthe Area file blank earlier you areable to manually key in point eleva-tion.

Here you give the signal height (SH).This must be given whether theinstrument point elevation or groundpoint elevation is to be calculated.In this example, SH = 1.0 m.

Now you can begin to measure yourfirst reference point. Aim and thenpress the A/M key.

The display shows HA, VA and SD toPno 1. Your measurement is nowready to be registered. Press the REGkey.

ENT

1.0

ENT

A/M

How touse

4.3.45

PRG

21


See next page.

From previous page.

Will you use several points for yourheight calculation or will one point beenough? Note the following:Your result will indicate a meanelevation. This is presented as adifference if two points are includedin the measurement. If, on the otherhand, you use 3 or more points, astandard deviation (S_dev) isobtained, based on all theobservations.In this example we shall measure twoadditional points whose heights areknown. Therefore answer the ques-tion with Yes (ENT).

Give reference point 2, which is to beused for height determination, andrepeat the instruction above.In this example we have also mea-sured and stored a third point. Weassume now that these measurementsare concluded and we continue direc-tly to the question ”more?” after sto-ring Pno 3.

All the points to be used for heightdetermination are now stored.Answer the question ”more?” withNo. The program now immediatelycalculates any standard deviation.

P21 10:18

more?

P21 10:18

Pno =

P21 10:19

more?

REG

YES

NO

How touse

4.3.46

PRG

21


This is the standard deviation basedon all the observations. If the stan-dard deviation or difference in eleva-tion (in the case of 2 points) shouldbe too large, answer the question(Diff ok?) S_dev ok? with No, andperform the measurements again.

This is the ground point elevation ofyour free station. Press ENT.

If the result of your calculation is tobe used, the point must be stored inan Area file. Answer the questionwith Yes (ENT).

Note !If no instrument height was given (seepage 4.3.43) and the instrument pointelevation was calculated, the question”Store?” will not appear. However,the instrument will retain the eleva-tion data until it is switched off.

See next page.

From previous page.

P21 10:19S_dev = x.xxxS_dev ok ?

STD P21 10:19

ELE = xx.xxxx

P21 10:19

Store?

YES

ENT

YES

How touse

Note ! ☛

4.3.47

PRG

21


P21 10:20

Area =

From previous page.

P21 10:20

Replace Z?

Area fileNote ! ☛

Pno(Stn)=

ELE=

ENT

YES

Datastored intheselectedArea file.

How touse In this example, we wish to store the

elevation coordinates for our stationpoint in the same Area file as thestation coordinates for your freestation. Select the same Area file inwhich your free station establishmentis stored.

If an elevation already exists for thestation point you are given thequestion "Replace Z?". Press Yes orENT to store the new Z or press Noto keep the old one.

The program now returns to PO andyou can select the next program.

Here are the data stored in the Areafile you have selected.

4.3.48

PRG

22

PROGRAM 22 - ANGLE MEASUREMENTFIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

4.3.49

PRG

22


When using program 22, all you need to do is to locate thetargets one time in C1. When all targets are located andstored in your internal or external memory, you are able toselect the measuring mode in which you want to work:Standard or D-bar mode. Now the instrument's servo motorswill do the rest. The instrument will rotate and point directlyin CII against the first registered target, you will then makethe necessary fine adjustments and registrations by pressingthe A/M-key in front. For rotation to CI, depress the A/Mkey for a couple of seconds.Note that this program can only be used when using thestation unit as a total station.

PRG

22

A B

Stn

C2 + C1 C2 + C1

In general

Angle measuring - In general

4.3.50

PRG

22


The Geodimeter is now in program 0(P0). Choose program 22 - AngleMeasurement.

The program name "Ang. Meas." isseen very briefly on the display follo-wed by request of which Job file youwant to store your angle measure-ments in. Key in, for example, 16......

Here you select which memory deviceyou wish to store the Job file in bychoosing the appropriate number 1 or2. In this example we will select No. 2:Imem.

Key in the Stn. point name / number–e.g 1000. Press ENT.

STD P0 13.38HA: 310.8390VA: 98.1720

STD P22 13.381: Xmem off2: Imem off3: Serial off

STD P22 13.38

Job no:

STD P22 13.38

Stn =

See next page

PRG

ENT

ENT

2

Note! ☛See part 2,MemoryUnits

PRG

22

How touse

How to use

4.3.51

PRG

22


STD P22 13.38

HT measure?

STD P22 13.39

Aim to pointPress REG

If heights are to be measured the nextquestion would be IH (instrumentheight). In this example we will pressNO, which means that instrument andsignal height is not taken into account.

Here you have the opportunity tochoose the numerical value of thePcode (Pcode is additional software).We will answer NO ...

Key in the number of the first target atwhich you wish to begin your anglemeasurement, e.g. 200 ENT...

Make a coarse aiming towards the firsttarget, then press REG......

STD P22 13.39

Pno =

STD P22 13.39

Pcode ?

See next page

From previous page

NO

NO

ENT

REG

How touse

4.3.52

PRG

22


In this example we will continue tomeasure towards more targets. PressYES.....

Key in the second target number – e.g.,201 ENT....

Make a coarse aiming towards thesecond target, then press REG......

From previous page

13.39

more ?

STD P22 13.39

Pno =

STD P22 13.39

Aim to pointPress REG

See next page

YES

ENT

REG

How touse

4.3.53

PRG

22


Repeat the instructions above for yourfollowing targets. When all yourtargets are stored you will answer noto this question. Press NO.....

The program gives you the opportunityto select in which measuring mode youwant to work. In this example we willselect No. 2= D-bar mode....

The instrument starts to rotate to C2position, aiming at target No. 200.

The number of sightings is entirely upto you, the operator, and will dependmainly on the visibility conditions andthe type and required accuracy of thesurvey work. In this example we havechosen to make two sightings in C2.Approach the target from the otherdirection using the motion screws andpress A/M...

After pressing A/M the second time,the mean of angular C2 values isstored in the memory of the instru-ment. The rule when measuring anglesin this mode is that the same numberof sightings must be made in both C2and C1. Rotate the instrument to C1position by depressing the A/M key infront for approx. 2 sec.

Select mod 13.391 Std.2 D bar.

13.39

more ?

C2:I Press in front

Press in frontC2:II

Press in front

See next page

From previous page

NO

2

How touse

4.3.54

PRG

22


From previous page

D P0 13:40HA: 123.9965VA: 102.2230II:2 I:1

D P0 13:40HA: 123.9965VA: 102.2223dH:05 dV:03

D P0 13:40*HA: 123.9965VA: 102.2230SD: 33.114

Approach the target from the otherdirection using the motion screws.Press A/M.

The second C1 angle measurement andindication of completion (i.e., II:2) isvery quickly shown on the display..

However, the values now seen on thedisplay are the final mean horizontaland vertical angle values of the meanof the angles measured in both faces.The dH & dV values displayed are theamounts by which the angles havebeen adjusted – i.e., half the sum ofthe remaining horizontal and verticalcollimation and pointing errors.Now it is time to measure the distance.Press A/M or REG if length is not tobe measured.

Distance is continually measured andupdated while mean angular values arefrozen.To view the HD and VD to the point,press ENT....

See next page

A/M

A/M

ENT

How touse

4.3.55

PRG

22


From previous page

How touse

D P0 13:40*HA: 123.9965HD: 33.095VD: -1.155

D P0 13:40*N: 5188.555E: 2148.186ELE: 397.851

To view the N, E and ELE of thepoint.....

To continue, press the REG key andthe instrument will aim at the nexttarget in C2 position. Repeat theinstructions above.

Note !After the last point your are prompted"Repeat ?" If answering Yes to thisquestion, all points are remeasured.

ENT

REG

Note! ☛

Job fileStnIH If measuring heightsPnoPcode If Pcode is enteredHAVASD If distance measurement has be doneHAII 0 if no measurement in face 2VAII 0 if no measurement in face 2HAI 0 if no measurement in face 2 D- modeVAI 0 if no measurement in face 2 D- mode • •

The following data is stored in the chosen Job file afterpressing the REG key.

4.3.56

PRG

23

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3 PROGRAM 23 - SET OUT

4.3.57

PRG

23


SetOut - In generalSetOut will allow you to set out points in the field muchquicker and will also give you access to an automatic pointcheck and storage routine.

SetOut Point DataStorage of coordinates and heights of known points is carriedout with Program 43 - ENTER COORD. Use of Program 43means manual keying in of the points. Point storage can becarried out either in Geodat or Internal Memory. During therunning of programs 20/23, the stored coordinates arerecalled from the specified Geodimeter memory device(GMD) and are used for both orientation of the instrumentstation and calculation of the bearing and horizontal distanceto the set out points.

Automatic Check of Set Out Point´s PositionAfter having set out the point, you can check its positionaccuracy relative to the stored point coordinates and height.These deviations are displayed in form of radial and rightangle offsets plus height difference. The ± signs of thesedeviations corresponds to left and right in relation to thepoint´s correct theoretical position. Once the point has beenset out i.e. when the offset values are zero or almost zero,P23 allows the deviations dN, dE and dELE to be stored inGeodat or Internal Memory. As a final check, the point´spresent actual coordinates i.e. N, E and ELE can be viewedand compared with the correct theoretical point coordinatesand elevation. If you would also like to store these N, E andELE values, we recommend that you configurate the userdefined output table (see page 4.3).

PRG

23

In general

4.3.58

PRG

23


The instrument’s station has beenestablished. Select program 23(SetOut).

Key in the number of the Jobfile inwhich you want to store the set outpoint data. Then press ENT.

Activate the device you wish forstorage of the Job file by choosing theappropriate number 1, 2 or 3.

P0 10:16

Temp = 20.0

P23 10:17

Job No=_

PRG 23

ENT

PRG

23

How to use

How to use

See next page

P23 10:171: Xmem off2: Imem on3: Serial off

ENT

2

ENT

4.3.59

PRG

23


From previous page.

This was the Station No. you enteredin program 20, Station Establish-ment. Press ENT.If no station establishment has beenmade, P23 will automatically proposeestablishment of a known or freestation (P20) when you press ENT.See page 4.3.2

Key in the Area file number in whichthe set out point coordinates arestored and press ENT.

Choose what type of device in whichthe points are stored. If heights are tobe set out, next question would beSH=.

If you have entered a Pcode for theset out point you can enter thedesired Pcode here. The program willthen seek for the point with thatPcode. If you have no Pcode justleave the line blank and press ENT.

See next page.

How touse

P23 10:17

Stn=1000

P23 10:17

Area=_

P23 10:171 Xmem2 Imem

ENT

2

P23 10:17

Pcode=_

ENT

ENT

Note! ☛Signalheight

4.3.60

PRG

23


TRK P23 10:17HA: 50.000dHA: 70.000

From previous page.

How touse

The program suggests the first pointin the Areafile. Accept it or key in thepoint number at which you wish tobegin with your setting out task. Inthis example we key in 206.

Note!If you have more than one point inthe Areafile to set out the programwill automatically suggest the nextpoint.

Check the coordinates and answerYES to accept them or NO.

The instrument now automaticallyswitches to the TRK-mode.

The instrument should be rotated tothe right + 70.000 degrees.-=Left+=RightHere follows the count down to zeroangle method. See page 4.3.63 for theradial/right angle method.

P23 10:17

Pno=1

ENT

206

Pno ok?N=975.000E=1025ELE=4.098

YES

See next pageTrial point

dHA=70°

Instrumentpoint

Referenceobject

Set out point

HA=50°

N

Note! ☛If youhave servoyou canrotate theinstru-ment bypressingthe key

Note! ☛

4.3.61

PROGRAM 23 - SET OUT

PRG

23

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

Countdown to zero method

When the instrument displays dHAapprox. 0.0000 it is pointing in thedirection of the point to set out.HA is the calculated bearing to the setout point.

As soon as the prism comes withinthe measurement beam you will seedHD=remaining. In this case theprism is on line but the distance hasto be increased by 2.75m.

Measurement tip!It is convenient to decrease thenumber of decimals in the Label77=dHA. This can be done via menu13.

The point is now set out. Press ENTto check the points coordinates anddeviations to the theoretical set outpoint. Switch to STD or D-bar modeto check the point more accurately.

How touse

From previous page.

TRK P23 10:17HA:120.0000dHA:0.0000

TRK P23 10:17dHA:0.0000dHD:2.75dHT:0.155

TRK P23 10:17dHA:0.0000dHD:0.00dHT:0.000

See next page

Note! ☛Measure-ment tip

Note - Rotate the instrument with servo!If you press without measured distance ELE=the height at thetheoretical set out point.If you press with measured distance ELE=the height at themeasured set out point.If you press longer than 1 sec. with measured distanceELE=the height at the theoretical set out point.

›‹

4.3.62


PRG

23


How touse

TRK P23 10:18Radofs:0.00RT.ofs:0.00dHT:0.000

When the radial offset, right angleoffset and dHT are 0.00, the correctlateral set out position and heighthave been set out.Note - skip point !If you have difficulties to set out thepoint, the program will give you aopportunity to skip it. Turn theinstrument away from the prismwhen HA and dHA are displayed andpress Reg. The question "SkipPoint?" will be displayed. AnswerYES to this question and the programwill continue with the next setting outpoint.

When you press REG, these are thethree values which are stored in thememory, i.e. deviations from thecorrect set out point coordinates.Press REG to record deviations orENT to see coord. of the set outpoint. In this example we press ENT.

These are the actual coordinates ofthe set out point´s present position.Press REG to store the deviations.

The program continues with the nextset out point. Press the PRG-key and0 to exit to theodolite mode.

ENT

TRK P23 10:18dN:0.00dE:0.00dELE:0.000

ENT

TRK P23 10:18N:975.000E:1025ELE:4.098

REG

From previous page

Definition of dELE and dHT

Next set out point

Note! ☛Skippoint

Set out point

+dHT

-dHT+dELE

-dELE

4.3.63


PRG

23


How touse

Radial/Right angle offset method

Aim the instrument towards theprism bearer.

When the prism comes within themeasurement beam you will seedHD=remaining. Press ENT to seethe values for radial and right angleoffsets.

In this case the prism should bemoved 3 meters towards the instru-ment and 2 meters to the left. Theinstrument should also be tilted up0.155 meters.

When the radial offset, right angleoffset and dHT are 0.00, the correctlateral set out position and heighthave been set out.

Set out point

Rad.ofs

RT.ofsTrial point

Instrumentpoint

TRK P23 10:18HA: 50.000dHA: 100.000

TRK P23 10:18dHA: 100.000dHD: 2.75dHT:0.155

TRK P23 10:18Radofs: 2.00RT.ofs: -3.00dHT: 0.155


ENT

See next page

From page 4.3.60

Referenceobject

4.3.64


PRG

23


ENT

TRK P23 10:18dN:0.00dE:0.00dELE:0.000

TRK P23 10:18N:975.00E:1025.00ELE:4.098

REG

How touse

When you press REG, these are thethree values which are stored in theImem, i.e. deviations from thecorrect set out point coordinates.Press REG to record deviations orENT to see coord. of the set outpoint. In this example we pressENT.

These are the actual coordinates ofthe set out point´s present position.Press REG to store the deviations.

The program continues with thenext set out point. Press the PRG-key and 0 to exit to theodolite mode.

Note - skip point !If you have difficulties to set out thepoint, the program will give you aopportunity to skip it. Turn theinstrument away from the prismwhen HA and dHA are displayedand press Reg. The question "SkipPoint?" will be displayed. AnswerYES to this question and the pro-gram will continue with the nextsetting out point.

Note! ☛Skippoint

From previous page

Next set out point

4.3.65

PRG

24

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3 PROGRAM 24 - REFLINE

AB

D

C

4.3.66

PRG

24


In general

RefLine is a program with many applications in the field.The idea is to measure markings along, or parallel to, apredetermined line. If, for example, you have two pointswhose coordinates are known, you can use this program toplace any number of points along the line or, at a specifieddistance, parallell to it.It does not matter whether you have visibility between thepoints or not. Nor does it matter if you go beyond the line’send points. The program will maintain the direction of theline independent of distance. The program can be used for avariety of applications in the field — for example, setting outfor pipelines or electric power lines, constructing facadewalls on profiles, for drainage ditches, along roadways, etc.RefLine (P24) also contains P20 (Station Establishment) andP43 (Enter Coordinates).

PRG

24

In general

Fig. 1 Programs included in Refline.

Program 24RefLine

The program is divided into two different parts:

• Known or Unknown lineYou can enter the coordinates for the reference line if theyare known or construct a reference line by measuring twopoints. In the first case it is necessary to have established thestation before using the program otherwise the program willautomatically propose station establishment, P20. In thesecond case it is not necessary to have established the stationsince the program will create a new coordinate system withorigo in the first point in the reference line.

Program 20Station Establishment


4.3.67

PRG

24


How to use

PRG

24

How touse

P24 10:16

Job no =

24 ENTPRG

2 ENT

1 ENT

P24 10:161. Xmem off2. Imem on3. Serial off

Select program 24 (RefLine).

Key in the number or name of the Jobfile in which you wish to store dataabout your reference line. A list ofdata stored in the selected Job file canbe seen on page 4.3.83.

Choose in which memory unit youwish to store your Job file. Activate/deactivate a memory unit by pressingits corresponding key number andENT. In this example we choose 2,Imem.

P0

See next page.

(0,0,0)

Reference Line

• Measure or SetOutIn the second part you can choose between measure and setout points from the reference line.

(0,0,0) Reference Line

Unknown LineKnown Line

N

E

N

E

AA

B

B

4.3.68

PRG

24


Choose 1 if you have already storedthe coordinates for the points in thereference line or choose 2 to measurethem. In this example we choose 1since we already have stored thepoints. See page 4.3.69 for instruc-tions of how to measure the referenceline.

Is ”1” your station?If no station establishment has beenmade, P24 will automatically proposeestablishment of a known or freestation (that is, P20, StnEst) whenyou press ENT. In this example, wewill continue by accepting thesuggested station. Press ENT.

Key in the name of the Area file inwhich we have stored the pointswhose coordinates are known, whichwe shall be using to establish ourreference line.

In which memory unit is the Area filestored? In this example we are usingthe internal memory (Imem).

From previous page

Known line

P24 10:161 Known Line2 Unknown Line

1

P24 10:16

Stn =1


2

P24 10:17

Area =

ENT

See next page

ENT

4.3.69

PRG

24


Pno ok ?N=61814.748E=21817.195ELE=21.890

ENT

Key in the point number for point Aon your reference line. Point A=Pno100.If you have chosen to include heightsin your station establishment andELE is missing for the point thefollowing display appears and youmust enter the elevation manually:

Are your coordinates correct? PressENT to accept them. If they have tobe changed, press NO and use Edit orP43 (Enter Coordinates).We will continue by accepting them.

Key in the point number for point Bon your reference line. Point B = Pno101.

Are your coordinates correct? PressENT to accept them. If they have tobe changed, press NO and use Edit orP43 (Enter Coordinates).We will continue by accepting them.

Known line

P24 10:17Ref.line pointBPno =

Pno ok ?N=61825.772E=21807.023ELE=20.768

ENT

From previous page

P24 10:17Ref.line pointAPno =

100 ENT

Z not found

ELE=_

101 ENT

See page 4.3.67

Note! ☛If ELE ismissingyou canenter itmanually.

Note! ☛If ELE ismissingyou canenter itmanually.

4.3.70

PRG

24


In this example we choose 2 since wewant to measure two points and usethem as reference line.

Are you going to measure heights?If you decide not to measure heightsit means that the instrument height(IH) and signal height (SH) will beignored. In this example we choose tomeasure heights. Press YES or ENT.

Enter the instrument height and pressENT.

Key in the point number for point Aon your reference line. Point A=Pno200.

P0 and memory procedure

Unknownline

P24 10:171 Known Line2 Unknown Line

P24 10:17Ref.line point APno=

STD P24 10:17

IH=

P24 10:17

HT measure ?

2

YES

200 ENT

See next page

ENT

4.3.71

PRG

24


Enter the signal height and pressENT.

Aim at the first point, pnt A and pressA/M to start measurement.

When you are ready press REG tostore the point.

Key in the point number for point Bon your reference line. Point B=Pno201.

From previous page

Unknownline

STD P24 10:17HA: 165.2355VA: 106.5505

STD P24 10:17HA: 165.2350VA: 107.0020SD: 37.225

A/M

STD P24 10:17Ref.line point BPno=

REG

201 ENT

See next page

P24 10:17

SH=

ENT

4.3.72

PRG

24



Aim at the second point, pnt B, andpress A/M to start measurement.

When you are ready press REG tostore the point.

From previous page

Unknownline

P24 10:17

SH=

STD P24 10:17HA: 200.0056VA: 102.1095

STD P24 10:17HA: 201.0001VA: 102.1096SD: 12.0022

1 ENT

A/M

REG

See next page

4.3.73

PRG

24


See next page.

Measure

P24 10:181 Meas2 Setout3 Exit

STD P24 10:18HA: 36.5110VA: 102.8955

P24 10:18

Slope=-98.90740

P24 10:18

SH=

A/M

Choose whether you wish to measureor set out points relative yourreference line. You can also exit fromthe program with 3. In this case wechoose to measure points. Press 1.

See page 4.3.76 for setout instruc-tions.

The program has calculated a slopefor the reference line with help of thepoints A and B. The slope is definedas ‰ (per thousand). Accept it or keyin a new slope. The slope of the line isexpressed as a negative figure perthousand from point A for a down-ward slope, and as a positive figurefor an upward slope. In the case of aslope, dELE is the deviation from thetheoretical elevation of the point.

Enter the signal height.

Aim at the first point and press A/Mto start measurement.Note! You can also change to anothermeasurement mode at this point(TRK or D-bar).

1

ENT0.7

ENT

4.3.74

PRG

24


From previous page

Measure

STD P24 10:18Radofs: 10.010RT.ofs: 2.010dELE:0.002

Radofs is a definition of how far yourmeasured point lies from point A.RT.ofs is defined as the right-angledistance from reference line AB.dELE is the difference in height frompoint A. If you have defined a slopeas a ‰ (per thousand), dELE iscalculated as the deviation from thetheoretical point.

See fig. 2 for offset definitions.

REG

See next page

Reference LineA B

-RT.ofs

+RT.ofs

-Radofs +Radofs

A

B

RT.ofsRadofs

dELE

Measured pnt.

Fig. 2 Offset definitions measuring mode

4.3.75

PRG

24


Measure P24 10:18

Pno=

What name/number will you giveyour new control point? Key in thename and ENT to store Pno, Radofs,RT.ofs, and the coordinates, in theJob file you have chosen in Imem.Theprogram will automatically incrementthe point number when you continuewith the next point. See page 4.3.83for a list of what is stored in afterregistration.

Here you have the opportunity tochoose a Pcode for the measuredpoint. The numerical value you entercorresponds to an alpha title whichyou enter with Program 45, Pcode.If you leave the line blank no Pcodewill be stored and the question willnot appear for the next point.

Do you wish to measure more pointspress YES or ENT, otherwise pressNO to step to the mode menu.

From previous page

P24 10:18

Continue ?

STD P24 10:18HA: 33.0092VA: 100.0033

P24 10:181 Measure2 Setout3 Exit

YES NO

P24 10:18

Pcode=

ENT

ENT

4.3.76

PRG

24


Setout withRadofs/RT.ofs

P24 10:181 Radofs/Rt.ofs2 Coord


Choose whether you wish to measureor set out points relative yourreference line. You can also exit fromthe program with 3. In this case wechoose to setout points. Press 2.

This menu will only appear if youhave a known reference line.Choose 1 to set out with Radofs andRt.ofs.

See page 4.3.80 for instructions ofhow to set out with coordinates.


Enter a number for the first point youwish to set out. The program willautomatically increment the pointnumber when you continue with thenext point.

Here you have the opportunity tochoose a Pcode for the measuredpoint. The numerical value you entercorresponds to an alpha title whichyou enter with Program 45, Pcode.If you leave the line blank no Pcodewill be stored and the question willnot appear for the next point.

2

P24 10:18

Pcode=

P24 10:18

Pno=

P24 10:18

SH=

ENT0.7

1

ENT

ENT

4.3.77

PRG

24


P24 10:18

SHT=

Setout withRadofs/RT.ofs

P24 10:18

Radofs=

Enter the radial offset to the set outpoint. See fig. 3.

Enter the right angle offset to the setout point. See fig. 3.

Enter the height for the set out point.

The instrument switches to TRK-mode. When dHA ≈ 0.0000 theinstrument is pointing in the directionof the set out point. As soon as theprism comes within the measurementbeam you will see dHD =remaining.Press ENT to see the values for radialand right angle off-sets or press REGto registrate the point.


Fig. 3 Offset definitions set out with Radofs/RT.ofs

P24 10:18

Rt.ofs=

A B

-RT.ofs

Set Out Point

Reference Line+RT.ofs

See next page+Radofs-Radofs

TRK P24 10:18dHA: 0.0000dHD: 0.00dHT: 0.000

ENT

ENT

ENT

4.3.78

PRG

24


TRK P24 10:18dN:0.00dE:0.00dELE:0.000

ENT

Set out withRadofs/RT.ofs

When the radial offset, right angleoffset and dHT are 0.00, the correctlateral set out point position andheight have been set out. See fig. 4 foroffset definitions.

Press REG to register the set outdeviations, see fig. 4, or press ENT tosee the coordinates of the set outpoint.



ENT

ENT

-Radofs-RT.ofs

Instrument

Set Out Point

+Radofs

Reference Line

Stored Radofs

Stored RT.ofs +RT.ofs

A B

Fig.4 Offset definitions setout mode

See next page

4.3.79

PRG

24


Set out withRadofs/RT.ofs

TRK P24 10:18N:61900.00E:21447.22ELE:7.890

P24 10:18

Continue ?

REG

These are the actual coordinates ofthe set out point's position. PressREG to store the deviations.

See page 4.3.83 to see a list of what isstored in the memory.

Do you wish to set out more pointspress YES. Press NO to exit to themode menu.


P24 10:18

Pno=


YES NO

4.3.80

PRG

24


See next page

Setout withcoordinates


P24 10:18

Pcode=

P24 10:181 Radofs/Rt.ofs2 Coord

P24 10:18

SH=

In this case we are going to set outpoint with known coordinates. This isonly possible if we have a knownreference line.

Choose 2 to set out points withknown coordinates. This section issimilar to Program 23, SetOut. (Thisoption is not available for theunknown line).


If you have entered a Pcode for theset out point you can enter the desiredPcode here. The program will thenseek for the point with this Pcode. Ifyou don't have any Pcode just leavethe line blank and press ENT. If youleave it blank this question will notappear for the next point.

2

ENT0.7

2

ENT

4.3.81

PRG

24


See next page

Setout withcoordinates

P24 10:18

Pno=

Pno ok?N=61870.890E=21980.300ELE=4.098

The program suggests the first pointin the Areafile. Accept it or key anew.

Check the coordinates and answerYES to accept them or NO.

When dHA ≈ 0.0000 the instrumentis pointing in the direction of the setout point.As soon as the prism comes within themeasurement beam you will seedHD=remaining. Press ENT to seethe values for radial and right angleoffsets or press REG to registrate thepoint.

When the radial offset, right angleoffset and dHT are 0.00, the correctlateral set out point position andheight have been set out.

See page 4.3.78, fig.4, for the defini-tions of radial and right angle offsets.


TRK P24 10:18dHA:0.0000dHD:0.00dHT:0.000

ENT


ENT

ENT

4.3.82

PRG

24


Set out withcoordinates

When you press the REG key, theseare the three values which are storedin the memory, i.e. deviations fromthe correct set out point coordinates.Press REG to register the deviationsor press ENT to see coordinates ofthe set out point.

These are the actual coordinates ofthe set out point's position. PressREG to store the deviations.

See page 4.3.83 for a list of what isstored in the memory.

Do you wish to set out more pointspress YES. Press NO to exit to themode menu.

ENT

REG


TRK P24 10:18dN:0.00dE:0.00dELE:0.000

TRK P24 10:18N:61870.89E:21980.30ELE:4.098

STD P24 10:18

Continue ?

STD P24 10:18

Pno=


YES NO

4.3.83

PRG

24


Registereddata

The list below shows which data will be stored afterregistration.

Stn Coord.RefObj. Coord.HArefHDIH

Pno1 (A). Coord*Pno2 (B). Coord*Slope

Pno 1.SHCoord.Radofs¤RT.ofs¤dELE

PnoRadofs¤RT.ofs¤dELE

PnodNdEdELE

Station establishment

Distance to ref. obj. (known stn.)

Coordinates for the reference line

Stored only in measure mode

Measured data, control points

Setout data, control points

Setout data, control pointsCoordinate deviations

Job file in Imem Comments

Measure mode

Setout mode with Radofs/RT.ofs

Setout mode with coordinates

* Stored only if using a known reference line¤ Relative the reference line

4.3.84

PROGRAM 25 - AREA CALCULATIONFIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG

25

4.3.85


PRG

25

Area Calculation - In general

With program 25 you are able to calculate the area and thevolume between measured points.The program contains three main functions:

1. CalcWith this function youcan calculate the areabetween measuredpoints in the order theyare registered.

2. Arrange listWith this function youcan arrange a list ofmeasured points andcalculate the areabetween the points inthe order they arearranged in the list.

3. VolumeWith this function youcan enter a height for thecalculated area andcalculate the volume.

P1

P2

P4

P3

P2P3

P4

P1

P1

P2

P3

P4

HT

PRG

25

In general

4.3.86


PRG

25 The Geodimeter is now in program 0(P0). Choose program 25 - Area Calc.

Here can choose if you want tocalculate the area in the order thepoints are measured (1 Calc) or if youwant to arrange the points in a diffe-rent order and calculate that area.Here we choose 1 Calc.

Key in the Job file in which themeasured points are stored and pressENT.

In which memory unit is the Job filelocated. In this example it is in theinternal memory. Press 2.Note!If Info 32 appears it may be that theJob file you have keyed in does notexist in the chosen memory unit or ifyou are using an external memory thatthe connections are bad.If Info 44 appears it may be that theJob file does not contain right pointdata.

STD P0 13:38HA: 310.8390VA: 98.1720

P25 13:38

Job no=_

P25 13:381 Calc2 Arrange list

Sel.device 13:381 Xmem2 Imem

See next page

2

1

PRG 25

How to use

PRG

25

How touse - Calc.

Note ! ☛

ENT

4.3.87


PRG

25

P25 13.38

SqrAre=3163.50

P25 13.39

volume=-218281.5

Here is the calculated area. Press enterto continue.

Do you want to calculate a volume.Press YES to accept or NO to cancel.In this case we accept with YES.

Key in the height of the volume.In this case we key in 10 and pressENT.

Here is the calculated volume.Press ENT to exit the program.

P25 13.39

HT=

P25 13.39

volume?

From previous page

ENT

YES

ENT

ENT

How touse - Calc.

4.3.88


PRG

25 The Geodimeter is now in program 0(P0). Choose program 25 - Area Calc.

Here can choose if you want tocalculate the area in the order thepoints are measured (1 Calc) or if youwant to arrange the points in a diffe-rent order and calculate that area.Here we choose 2 Arrange list.

Key in the Job file in which themeasured points are stored and pressENT.

In which memory unit is the Job filelocated. In this example it is in theinternal memory. Press 2.Note!If Info 32 appears it may be that theJob file you have keyed in does notexist in the chosen memory unit or ifyou are using an external memory thatthe connections are bad.If Info 44 appears it may be that theJob file does not contain right pointdata.

STD P0 13.38HA: 310.8390VA: 98.1720

P25 13.38

Job no=_

P25 13.381 Calc2 Arrange list

Sel.device 13.381 Xmem2 Imem

See next page

PRG 25

2

2

How touse -Arrangelist

Note ! ☛

ENT

4.3.89


PRG

25

13:38

Pno=1

Pno ok?N=14E=15ELE=16

Key in the first point no in the area.The point must exist in your Job file.In this case we key in 1 and pressENT.

Here is the point coordinates dis-played. Accept the point with YES orcancel with NO. Here we accept thepoint.

Key in the second point in the area.In this case we key in point no 4.

Accept the point coordinates with YESor cancel them with no.

13.39

Pno=1

Pno ok?N=10E=20ELE=30

From previous page

See next page

1

4

YES

YES


4.3.90


PRG

25

13:39

more?

STD P0 13:39HA: 45.0009VA: 120.0984

After having keyed in 3 points youhave the chance to calculate the area.Press YES to continue key in morepoints or press NO to calculate thearea.

Here is the calculated area. Press ENTto continue.

Do you want to calculate the volume.Press YES to accept or NO to cancel.In this example we press NO.

You are now returned to program 0.

13:39

volume?

13:39

SqrAre=9.00

From previous page

NO

ENT

NO


4.3.91

PRG

26

PROGRAM 26 - DISTOBFIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

4.3.92

PRG

26


DistOb - In generalDistOb will allow you to calculate distances between objectseven if the line of sight is obstructed. The program calculatesthe horizontal distance and the difference in height betweentwo points. If the instrument is oriented in a coordinatesystem the true bearing (azimuth) between the two pointswill be calculated as well.

How do I Work with DistObThis is done simply by choosing the program No 26. Select aStn.point where you have a free line of sight to the twopoints between which you would like to measure thedistance.

The result is given in the form of HA=bearing,HD=horizontal distance and DHT=difference in heightbetween these two points.

PRG

26

HA

HD2

Station

Angle

1

In general

4.3.93

PRG

26


The actual measuring can be made using two differentcombinations:

Combination 1HA, HD and DHT are displayed as the measured andcalculated result between point 1 to 2, 2 to 3 and so on.

Combination 2HA, HD and DHT are displayed as the measured andcalculated result between point 1 to 2, 1 to 3 and so on.

1

2

3

4

2

3

4

1

In general

4.3.94

PRG

26


Switch on the instrument and go through the Start procedureuntil the instrument is in theodolite mode.

How to use

The instrument’s station has beenestablished. Select program 26(DistOb).

If you want to measure the distancebetween two objects choose 2. Meas.If you want to calculate the distancebetween two points stored in thememory choose 1. File, see page4.3.98.

Key in the number of the Jobfile inwhich you want to store your bearingdistance and height.

STD P0 10:16HA=392.9095VA=102.8955

PRG 26

ENT

PRG

26

How touse -2 Meas

P26 10:17

Job No=_

See next page

P26 10:171 File2 Meas

2

ENT

4.3.95

PRG

26


From previous page.

You can activate which device youwish for the storage of the Job file bychoosing the appropriate number 1, 2or 3.

Select the first point you want tomeasure from. Key in e.g. 1 and pressENT.

Note!If you select a point that already hasbeen measured in a previous task, thispoint will not be remeasured.

Key in the Signal Height and pressENT.

The instrument is in theodolite mode.Aim to the first point and press theA/M key.

P26 10:171:Xmem off2:Imem on3:Serial off

P26 10:17FromPno=

See next page.

P26 10:17

SH=

STD P26 10:17HA: 36.5110VA: 102.8955

1

2

ENT

A/M

How touse -2 Meas

Note! ☛

ENT

4.3.96

PRG

26


See next page.

From previous page.

STD P26 10:17HA: 36.5110VA: 102.8955SD: 247.517

STD P26 10:17ToPno=1_

STD P26 10:17

SH=

STD P26 10:17HA: 50.1585VA: 104.1620

The instrument has now measuredangle and distance to Pno=1. Thevalues are ready for registration.Press REG.

The program remembers the latestmeasured point. Choose the secondpoint. Key in 2 and press ENT.

Key in the signal height. In thisexample we key in 1.000 and pressENT.

The instrument is in theodolite mode.Aim to the second point and press A/M.

REG

ENT

ENT

1.000

A/M

2

How touse -2 Meas

4.3.97

PRG

26


more ?DHT=4.784Grade=8.984

Store ?DHT=4.784Grade=8.984

P26 10:18FromPno=2

From previous page.

The instrument has now measuredangle and distance to Pno=2. Thevalues are ready for registration.Press REG.

The result is calculated and shown inform of:HA=Horizontal angle (Bearing)HD=Horizontal distancePress ENT to see more.

DHT=Difference in height.Grade=Slope between the includedpoints in percent (DHT/HD).Press YES to store the results.

Do you want to continue press YES.Press NO to exit.

You are now able to continue withthe next point.

How touse -2 Meas

STD P26 10:18HA: 50.1585VA: 104.1620SD: 98.732

STD P26 10:18HA=227.7320HD=152.443Press ENT...

REG

ENT

YES

YES

4.3.98

PRG

26


Choose 1 File

Key in the number of the Jobfile inwhich you want to store your bearingdistance and height.

In which memory device do you wantto store your Jobfile. Press ENT.

In which Areafile are your pointcoordinates stored. Key in thenumber press ENT.Note - The points must have anelevation.

In which memory device is theAreafile stored.

P26 10:171 File2 Meas

P26 10:17

Job no=_

How touse -1 File

1

P26 10:171:Xmem off2:Imem off3:Serial off

P26 10:17

Area=_

9

Sel devic 10:171 Xmem2 Imem

2

2

ENT

ENT

4.3.99

PRG

26


How touse -1 File

Select the first point in thecalculation. Key in e.g. 1 and pressENT.

Select the second in the calculation.Key in e.g 2 and press ENT.

The result is calculated and shown inform of:HA=Horizontal angle (Bearing)HD=Horizontal distancePress ENT to see more.

DHT=Difference in height.Grade=Slope between the includedpoints in percent (DHT/HD).Press YES to store the results.

Do you want to continue press YES.Press NO to exit to P0.

P26 10:17FromPno=1_

P26 10:17ToPno=2_

2

P26 10:17HA=200.0000HD=2.000Press ENT ...

Store?DHT=2.000Grade=100.000

more ?DHT=2.000Grade=100.000

ENT

1

YES

NO

P0

4.3.100

PRG

28

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3 PROGRAM 28 - OBSTRUCTED POINT

4.3.101

PRG

28


In general

Obstructed Point is a program which will help you tomeasure towards obstructed points.The method simplifies the measuring task since the rangepole does not have to be held in a levelled position.Mount two prisms on a range pole. Locate the pole on thedifficult point and measure towards each prism. The pro-gram will then calculate the position of the difficult point.To get the best result locate the prism B as close as possibleto the obstructed point, C. The highest accuracy of themeasurement is also achieved if the distance between prism Aand B, dist AB, is as large as possible. See fig 1.

PRG

28

In general

dist BC

Fig. 1 Distance definitions.

Unknownpoint (C)

B

A

dist AB

4.3.102

PRG

28


How to use

PRG

28

How touse

Mount two prisms on a range pole and note the distance BC,see fig.1 on page 4.3.101. The distance between the twoprisms will be calculated and does not have to be entered.Locate the pole on the obstructed point (it is not necessary tohold the pole in a levelled position).Startup the instrument and follow the instructions below.

P28 10:16

Job no =

Select program 28 (Obstructed Point).

Key in the number or name of the Jobfile in which you wish to store dataabout your measurements. A list ofdata stored in the selected Job file canbe seen on page 4.3.106.

Choose in which memory unit youwish to store your Job file. Activate/deactivate a memory unit by pressingits corresponding key number andENT. In this example we choose 2,Imem.

Enter the prism offset and press ENT.

P0

1 ENT


2 ENT

P28 10:16

Prism=

28 ENTPRG

See next page

ENT0

4.3.103

PRG

28


P28 10:16

meas A

Enter the distance BC, that is thedistance between prism B and theobstructed point C. See page 4.3.101fig. 1.

Enter a point number for the point tobe measured and press ENT.

Here you have an opportunity toenter a Pcode for the point. Theprogram will propose the last Pcodeentered. Accept it, key in a new orleave it blank for no Pcode.If you leave it blank this question willnot appear for the next point.

Start with measuring towards the firstprism, A, and press ENT.Note !If you have a signal from the prismyou can start the measurement at thispoint by pressing A/M.

Aim towards the first prism, A, andpress the A/M-key to startmeasurement.

ObstructedPoint

P28 10:16

Pcode=

ENT

STD P28 10:17HA: 355.8192VA: 95.2208

ENT

ENT

A/M

P28 10:16

Pno=

ENT

P28 10:16

dist BC=

Note! ☛

4.3.104

PRG

28


See next page

From previous page

Press REG to registrate the firstmeasurement.

Continue with measuring towards thesecond prism, B and press ENT.Note !If you have a signal from the prismyou can start the measurement at thispoint by pressing A/M.

Aim towards the second prism, B, andpress the A/M-key to startmeasurement.

Press REG to registrate the secondmeasurement.

ObstructedPoint

P28 10:17

meas B

STD P28 10:17HA: 355.8193VA: 94.1800SD: 3.586

STD P28 10:17HA: 355.8192VA: 94.1760

REG

A/M

ENT

STD P28 10:17HA: 356.6407VA: 95.2208SD: 3.456

REG

Note! ☛

4.3.105

PRG

28



ObstructedPoint

These are the coordinates for theobstructed point. Press ENT to seemore data for the point or press REGto store the point and continue with anew measurement.Note - Skip pointIf you press CL the following displayappear and you are able to skip thepoint and continue with a new point:

HA=Horizontal Angle (Bearing)HD=Horizontal DistancePress ENT to see more or press REGto store the point and continue with anew measurement.Note - Skip pointPress CL to skip the point andcontinue with a new point.

DHT=Difference in height betweenthe obstructed point and the instru-ment.Grade=Slope between the obstructedpoint and the instrument in percent.

Press ENT to see the coordinates forthe point or press REG to store thepoint and continue with a newmeasurement.Note - Skip pointPress CL to skip the point andcontinue with a new point.

STD P28 10:17N: 2890.987E: 1098.879ELE: 222.098

ENT

Note! ☛Press CLto skip thepoint

STD P28 10:17HA: 354.1908HD: 96.0008

STD P28 10:17DHT=4.784Grade=8.984

ENT

REG

See the next page



STD P28 10:17

Skip point?

4.3.106

PRG

28


Registereddata

Job file in Imem Comments

Prism offset Stored before the firstdistance BC measurementUser defined data, pnt AUser defined data, pnt BActivity code Calculated data follows

Data for the obstructed point (C)

PnoPcode Stored if it has been enteredNEELEHAHDDHTGrade

P28 10:17

Pno=

The program automaticallyincrements the point number.Accept it, enter a new value or pressCL to exit to program 0.

CL

P0


Fig. 2. List of data stored in the selected Jobfile.

4.3.107

PROGRAM 29 - ROADLINE

PRG

29


4.3.108


PRG

29


RoadLine - In generalRoadLine is a program for setting out road/rail lines. It iseasy to use and contains routines for registering sectioninterval, centre offsets, section (="chainage" in somecountries or "station" in USA), coordinates and differenttypes of road/rail elements. The program also contains check/control function which ensures that the stored element para-meters are correct. Two methods can be used while settingout; 1. Conventional radial setting out and 2. Orthogonal orrectangular setting out. At key in of section interval (longitu-dal section) and optional centreline offset (-=Left, +=Right),the program automatically converts the setting out pointcoordinate values to setting out data i.e. Horizontal distanceand Bearing.

The program covers intergrated use of following programs:

PRG

29

In general

Enter CoordinatesP43

Station EstablishmentP20

RoadLineP29

4.3.109


PRG

29


StructureRoadline comprises 4 main functions:

1. StoreFor registration of the start and end coordinates of thedifferent elements.

2. CheckFor mathematical check of the stored element coordinatesand parameters.

3. Set OutFor setting out points along roadline both centreline andoffset, plus station establishment (Known or Free Station).

4. MeasureFor measuring in existing roadline elements, both centrelineand offset, and objects that may lie along the roadline.

StoreWith this function in the RoadLine program you store allroadline data, i.e. section interval, centre line offset, section,start and end coordinates of the different roadline elementsand type of element. A roadline can contain 3 types ofelements:

Straight

Circular Arc

Transition

Roadline data is stored in the form of section, start and endpoints of the element and the type of element, i.e. straight,arc or transition. This data is then either stored in theinternal memory of the instrument or in Geodat.

In general

❏

❏

❏

4.3.110


PRG

29


When storing circular arc and transition elements, radius andA-parameter must also be stored. While storing transitioncurves instead of keying in the A-parameter, the option tostore Radius and length is open (A=√ R x L). In this case, atthe prompt "Radius", key in the RxL factor, at the prompt"Length" key in -1 or 1 which is the direction of the curve (-=Left, no sign=Right).

When storing roadline data, you must ensure that thefollowing combinations do not occur in the data producedby your roaddesign program:

Transition - Transition - Transition

Straight - Transition - Transition

Transition - Transition - Straight

Straight - Transition - Straight

In order to overcome the problems concerning the mathe-matical solutions of any of the above combinations, they canbe overcome by defining a radius at the different elements´connecting points, i.e. by defining a straight or arc elementand placing it between the elements in question. These"pseudo elements" need only have a longitudal length of afew millimetres, which will not effect the accuracy of theeventual setting out of the points which lie along thoseelements. In the case of the first combination, store it withthis combination instead:

Transition - Straight - Transition - Straight- Transition

In general

❏

❏

❏

❏

❏

4.3.111


PRG

29


CheckThis function mathematically checks the stored coordinatesand curve parameters of the different elements afterregistration of the data in an Area file. All errors in excess of≥ 20mm are displayed and the element in which they are.Errors which occur due to wrongly keyed in In-Data can beeasily rectified with the help of Edit (MNU 2).

Note - errorA detected error can depend on either keyin in errors orincorrect design of the roadline.

Set OutBefore any setting out task can be commenced, it is necessaryof course to inform the Geodimeter of the position at whichthe instrument is set up. Program 29 contains Stationestablishment.

Setting out taskAfter establishment and orientation of your survey station,registration of section interval and centre line offset is carriedout (if it has not already been done with the STORE, optionfile). Directly thereafter the setting out data in the form ofhorizontal bearing and horizontal distance to the setting outpoint are calculated. If cross section data is available for eachor some sections, 3 dimensional setting out of cross sectionscan be executed. In this case questions regarding(HT_measure?) in the station establishment program must beanswered with YES.

MeasureThe option Measure enables the operator to localize thesection and centre line relative to a stored roadline. Yousimply measure an arbitrary point and the programcalculates the section/centre line offset and coordinates of thepoint. This part of the program is especially suitable forcross-sectioning or localizing an obstacle when checking aplanned section of road.

Note ! ☛

4.3.112


PRG

29


12

34

5

67

8

399.

990

770.

023

816.

690

1256

.031

1339

.3651425

.793

2232

.858

2387

.144

2712

.663

Stn.

Poin

tRe

f.Obj

ect

Stn.

Poin

t = 5

0N

=13

750

E =

2145

0

Ref.O

bjec

t = 5

1N

= 1

3900

E =

218

00

4.3.113


PRG

29


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

399.990

770.023

816.690

1256.031

1339.365

1425.793

2232.858

2387.144

2712.663

2825.163

2937.663

3175.785

3288.285

3297.592

13751,63

13766,681

13775,341

13892,688

13921,506

13951,437

14135,099

14145,571

14079,093

14029,418

13979,743

13918,354

13910,932

13910,536

20872,790

21241,440

21287,294

21710,267

21788,458

21869,538

22653,592

22807,429

23123,798

23224,709

23325,621

23554,785

23667,015

23676,313

circle

clothoid

circle

clothoid

clothoid

circle

clothoid

circle

clothoid

clothoid

circle

clothoid

straight

-1400

-350

-3000

-500

+550

+3500

+400

+800

+300

-300

-800

-300

-

Roadline exampleThis table is used in the following examples.

Roadlineexample Element Section Northing Easting Type Radius

no. /A-par.

4.3.114


PRG

29


Before beginning to use RoadLine in the field we recommendthat you run through the program in the office.Switch on the instrument, and disengage the dual-axiscompensator with function 22 and step through program 0by pressing only ENT until you place Geodimeter in thetheodolite mode.

P29 - 1. Store

The instrument’s station has beenestablished. Select program 29(RoadLine).

Now you can choose between thefour main functions. Let us start tostore roadline data. Press 1.

STD P0 10:16HA=392.9095VA=102.8955

Roadline 10:171 Store2 Check3 Setout

PRG 29

ENT

How to use

PRG

29

How touse -Store

Roadline 10:174 Measure

1

ENT

4.3.115


PRG

29


From previous page.

At this stage you are able to select ifyou want to store the Sectionincrementation and Offset, but thiscan also be done in Setout*. Let usselect Roadline. Press 1.

*Note!In this case the offset and incre-mentation values will not be savedwhen you exit the program.

This is a display of the memorydevices available. Let us select inwhich device we shall store ourroadline data e.g. Imem (InternalMemory). Press 2.

Key in the name of the Area file inwhich you wish to store the SectionNo., Coordinates and type ofelements and press ENT.

This is a switch key, you can chooseif you want to store A-param or ifyou want to store Radius and Length.In this case we choose 1.

Store 10:171 Roadline2 Sect/Offset

Sel.device10:171 Xmem2 Imem

See next page.

P29 10:17

Area=_

Clothoid 10:171 A-param2 Radius/Length

1

2

1

How touse -Store

Note! ☛

ENT

4.3.116


PRG

29


See next page.

From previous page.

P29 10:17

Sect.=0.000_

Key in the first Section No. for theroadline. In this example we key in399.990 and ENT.

Key in the Northing value of sectionNo. 399.990. In this example it is13751.63.

Key in the Easting value of sectionNo. 399.990. In this example it is20872.790.

Select type of roadline element,Straight, Arc or Roadline end bypressing NO until the correct elementtype is displayed. Accept the type byanswering YES.In this example we choose ARC.

P29 10:17

Sect.=399.990N=

P29 10:17

Sect.=399.990E=

P29 10:17

Sect.=399.990Straight?

ENT

ENT

ENT

YES

How touse -Store

4.3.117


PRG

29


From previous page.

Key in the radial dimension, in ourexample -1400. After you havepressed ENT, a beep signal will beheard. The roadline data for section399.990 are now stored in Area file100.

Key in the next section point andrepeat the above instructions. In thisexample we key in 770.023 andENT.

When you are selecting the last road-line element, select Roadline end.Roadline end=YES, means that thelast element will be stored as astraight line.Note!The last element must be a straightline.

You are now returned to the programP0.

P29 10:19

Sect.=399.990Radius=

P29 10:19

Sect.=0.000_

P29 10:19

Sect.=3297.592Straight?

STD P0 10:19HA: 266.9930VA: 110.1425

ENT

ENT

YES

How touse -Store

Note! ☛You mustend theroadlinewith aStraightline.

4.3.118


PRG

29


Choose program 29.

Let us select the control functionCHECK. Press 2.

Select in which device roadline data isstored. In this example it is in theinternal memory.

You have now stored all roadline data in Area file 100, thestored data are; the different types of roadline elements,section no. and coordinates.Now it´s time to check the keying in and geometricalsolutions of the different roadline elements with the help offunction CHECK.

P29 - 2. Check

STD P0 10:19HA=392.9095VA=102.8955



See next page

PRG 29

ENT

2

2

How touse -Check

4.3.119


PRG

29

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3From previous page.

Key in the name of the Area file youwish to check.

The program check each elementstored in Area file.Note - check routineA comparison with the total longitu-dinal centre line measurement of eachindividual section is carried out. If thefinal result gives an error message,one or more elements contain errorsin which curve length errors are ≥20mm. Re-check the roadline anddefine the element with an error. Theelement can be changed with EDIT(MNU 2).

After have gone through CHECK theinstrument returns to program P0.

P29 10:19

Area=_

P29 10:19

Elem:1Diff:

STD P0 10:19

Temp=20.0

Note ! ☛

How touse -Check

ENT

ENT

4.3.120


PRG

29


P29 - 3. Set Out

Choose program 29.

Let us select start the setting out.Press 3.

Key in the number of the Job file inwhich you want to store the set outpoint coordinate deviations.

STD P0 10:16HA=392.9095VA=102.8955


P29 10:17

Job no=0_

See next page

Storage of Control DataThe coordinate deviations will represent the differencesbetween stored set out point coordinates and the actual setout point coordinates. This is the basis of the printed outdata sheet which will act as proof of having carried out yoursetting out task to within the contract specified accuracy.

16

PRG 29

ENT

3

How touse -Set Out

4.3.121


PRG

29


These dN, dE and dELE deviations are also much easier touse than comparing actual set out values with their respectivetheoretical values. If you don´t want to store any controldata, clear the suggested Job no, and press ENT. Controldata that will be stored are:

Pno=Section/OffsetdN=dE=dELE=

If height measurement is carried out also elevation is stored(staked elevation). If you wish to store other control datayou can configurate the user defined output table (see 4.3)

Here you can activate which deviceyou wish for storage of the Job file bychoosing the appropriate number.Here we choose the internal memory.Press 2 and ENT.

Is "1" your station?As station establishment was doneprior to P29, this station will beproposed now. If no station establish-ment has been made, P29 will auto-matically propose establishment of aknown or free station (that is, P20Station Establishment) when youpress ENT. In this example we willcontinue by accepting the suggestedstation. Press ENT.

P29 10:171:Xmem off2:Imem off3:RS232 off

From previous page

P29 10:17

Stn=1

See next page

2

ENT

ENT

How touse -Set Out

4.3.122


PRG

29


Choose the type of device in whichthe roadline data is stored. In thisexample we have stored the roadlinedata in Imem Area 100. Press 2.

Key in the Area file number in whichthe roadline data is stored and pressENT.

Here you are able to select whichSec.Inc. you shall have in thisroadline example. If you already havestored Sec. Inc. in "STORE", theprogram selects that value. Let usselect Sec.Inc.=10m. Press 10 andENT.

Now you are able to store the centreline offset."0"=centreline.

See next page.


P29 10:17

Area=_

P29 10:17

SecInc=10.000

P29 10:17

cl.ofs=

10 ENT

ENT0

2

How touse -Set Out

ENT

4.3.123


PRG

29


P29 10:17

Roadline checkWait !

From previous page.

Answer YES to this question if youhave more values to store, in ourexample -5m, -10m to the left and5m, 10m to the right. When all offsetvalues are stored answer NO to thequestion.

The program checks that the elementcombinations, shown on page4.3.110 do not occur. Wait !

The program suggests the first sectionin the Area file, but can easily bechanged to any value. In this examplewe accept the value, press ENT.

The program is presenting thecentreline for the first section, if okpress ENT, otherwise you will havethe opportunity to select anotheroffset value. Press ENT.

See next page.

P29 10:17

Sect.=399.990

P29 10:17

cl.ofs=0.00

P29 10:17

more ?

NO

ENT

ENT

How touse -Set Out

4.3.124


PRG

29


Is the setting out data for the firstsection ok, press YES. The instrumentadopts the TRACKING mode auto-matically.

Countdown to zero method

The instrument should be rotated tothe right +170.3595 degrees.-=Left+=RightThis is called the count down to zeroangle method.See page 4.3.127 for the radial/rightangle method.

When the instrument displaysapprox. 0.0000 opposite dHA, it ispointing in the direction of the firstsection point.HA is the calculated bearing to thefirst section point.

As soon as the prism comes withinthe measurement beam you will seedHD=remaining. In this case theprism is on line but the distance hasto be increased by 2.75m.

See next page.

TRK P29 10:17HA:129.8210dHA:170.3595

TRK P29 10:17HA:300.2475dHA:0.0000

TRK P29 10:17dHA:0.0000dHD:2.75dHT:-0.155

P29 10:17Sect.:399.990cl.ofs:0.00ok?

YES

How touse -Set Out

4.3.125


PRG

29


How touse -Set Out

When the radial offset, right angleoffset and dHT are 0.00, the correctlateral set out position and heighthave been set out.

Measurement tipWhen using the count down to zeroas your setting out method, it isconvenient to decrease the number ofdecimals in the Label 77=dHA. Thiscan be done via menu 13.

Note - skip pointIf you during the setting out will havedifficulties in being able to set out thepoint, the program will give you aopportunity to skip it. Just press Regand the question "Skip Point?" willbe displayed. Answer YES to thisquestion and the program will con-tinue with the next setting out point.

When you press REG, these are thethree values which are stored in theImem, i.e. deviations from the correctset out point coordinates.Press REG to record deviations orENT to see coord. of the set outpoint. In this example we press ENT.

From previous page.

TRK P29 10:18dN:0.00dE:0.00dELE:0.000


Note! ☛Skippoint

See next page.

ENT

ENT

Note - Rotate the instrument with servo!If you press without measured distance ELE=the height at thetheoretical set out point.If you press with measured distance ELE=the height at themeasured set out point.If you press longer than 1 sec. with measured distanceELE=the height at the theoretical set out point.

›‹

4.3.126


PRG

29


How touse -Set Out

Definition of dELE and dHT

From previous page.

These are the actual coordinates ofthe set out point´s present position.Press REG to store the deviationsseen on the previous page.

The program suggests the nextsection stored in Area file. Key in thesection number and centreline offsetyou want to work with and repeat theabove instructions.

TRK P29 10:18

Sect.=409.990

TRK P29 10:18N:13749.99E:21447.22ELE:0.313

REG

Set out point

+dELE

-dELE

-dHT

+dHT

4.3.127


PRG

29


Radial/Right angle offset method

When you have a radial and rightangle offset of 0.00 the correct lateralset out position has been found, i.e.N&E only!

When you press REG, these are thethree values which are stored in theImem, i.e. deviations from the correctset out point coordinates.Press REG to record deviations orENT to see coord. of the set outpoint.In this example we press ENT.

These are the actual coordinates ofthe set out point´s present position.Press REG to store the deviationsseen on the previous page.

The program suggests the nextsection. Key in the section numberand centreline offset you want towork with and repeat the aboveinstructions.

TRK P29 10:18dN:0.00dE:0.00dELE:0.000

TRK P29 10:18N:13749.99E:21447.22ELE:0.313

TRK P29 10:18

Sect.=409.990


ENT

ENT

REG

How touse -Set Out

4.3.128


PRG

29


How to combine countdown to zero and radial/rightangle offset for setting outIn order to benefit most from the inherent intelligence ofyour Geodimeter, we recommend that you try to combine thetwo different setting out methods, previously described.Here below is an example of how we combine the count-down to zero method with the radial and right angle offsetmethod.

1. If the setting out data for the first section is ok, press YESand the instrument will automatically adopt the TRACKINGmode. The display will show the calculated bearing, Hz, andthe dHA.

2. Rotate the instrument until the display shows approx.dHA=0.0000.

3. The instrument is now pointing in the direction of the firstsetting out point.

4. Guide the prism bearer on line with help of the tracklight.

5. As soon as the prism comes within the measurement beam,you will see dHD=remaining distance to your set out point.

6. By pressing ENT at this stage, you are also able to see theradial and right angle offset to the point. When Radofs.=0.000 and RT.ofs.=0.000, the correct lateral set out positionis reached.

How touse -Set Out

4.3.129


PRG

29


Ref.point

How touse -Set Out

4.3.130


PRG

29


Height Setting OutIf cross section data is available for each or some sections, 3dimensional setting out of cross sections can be executed.The following questions must be answered with YES:

1. It is assumed that elevation exists in your Stn. coordinates.

2. The question height measurement "HT=?" comes up inthe program 20 Station Establishment.

3. If YES, "IH=?" (Instrument Height) appears auto-matically.

4. The question "SH=?" (Signal Height) appears when youenter the setting out part of the program. If you are going touse R.O.E (Remote Object Elevation) we recommend thatyou key in SH=0.

5. After given section interval and centreline offset thequestion "SHT" appears. Key in the information given inyour cross section.

Measurement tipIf you would like to set out the height e.g. at +1.0m, add1.0m to your instrument height and use R.O.E. WhendHT=0 you are pointing 1.0m above finished constructionlevel.

How touse -Set Out

4.3.131


PRG

29


P29 - 4. Measure

Choose program 29.

Let us select start the measuring.Press 4.

Key in the number of the Job file inwhich you want to store themeasured point coordinatedeviations.

In which memory device to you wantto store the Job file. In this case wechoose 2. The internal memory andpress ENT.

STD P0 10:16HA=392.9095VA=102.8955


P29 10:17

Job no=_

PRG 29

ENT

4

How touse -Measure

See next page

P29 10:171:Xmem off2:Imem off3:Serial off

ENT

2 ENT

4.3.132


PRG

29


Is "1" your station ?As station establishment was doneprior to P29, this station will be pro-posed now. If no station establish-ment has been made, P29 will auto-matically propose establishment whenyou press ENT.

Choose in what type of device in theroadline data is stored. In thisexample we have stored the roadlinedata in Imem.

In which area file are the roadlinedata stored?

The instrument is now in theodolitemode. Aim at the first point and pressA/M to start measurement.

Press the REG key to check thepoints location according to theroadline.

From previous page

P29 10:17

Stn=1_


P29 10:17

Area=

STD P29 10:17HA:76.5600VA:86.5555

STD P29 10:17HA: 391.2341HD: 4.641VD: 0.226

ENT

ENT

A/M

2

How touse -Measure

4.3.133


PRG

29


From previous page

The program checks if the point laysclose to any of the roadline sections.If no section is found INFO 32 willappear. The maximum distancebetween the point to measure and thenearest roadline section is 1.000m.

The point lays 16.891 meters fromroadline section 804.318. If this is okpress YES. If you answer NO theprogram will check if the point laysclose to any other section.

Here you have the opportunity tochoose a Pcode for the measuredpoint. If you leave the line blank noPcode will be stored and the questionwill not appear for the next point.

The program is now in theodolitemode. If you want to exit the pro-gram to program 0 press the programkey and then 0.

STD P29 10:17

Wait

STD P29 10:17Sect.: 804.318CL.ofs: -16.891OK ?

STD P29 10:17

Pcode=HOUSE

YES

REG

ENT

STD P29 10:17HA: 39.897VA: 120.899

PRG 0

How touse -Measure

4.3.134


PRG

39

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D

Program 39 - RoadLine 3D

In general 4.3.135Store 4.3.136

Horizontal alignment (Roadline) 4.3.138Vertical alignment (Height profile) 4.3.144Cross section (Road profile) 4.3.151Camber (Super elevation) 4.3.164Layer 4.3.169Length 4.3.174

Check 4.3.180Setout 4.3.182Measure 4.3.164Slope staking 4.3.200Reference point 4.3.206Registered data 4.3.227

4.3.135


PRG

39


In generalWith program 39, RoadLine 3D, you can measure and setoutroadlines in three dimensions.The program contains routines for storing, checking, settingout, measuring, slope staking and reference point. Two diffe-rent methods can be used while setting out, 1 conventionalradial setting out and 2 orthogonal or rectangular setting out.

Structure1. StoreThis function is divided in 5 subsections:1.1 Roadline- to store the horizontal spread of the roadline.1.2 Vertical alignment - to store the vertical spread of the roadline.1.3 Cross sections definition - to store the different cross sections for the roadline.1.4 Cross section - to describe how the different cross sections changes along the road.1.5 Camber (Super elevation) - to define how much the road slopes.1.6 Layer - to store road layer data.1.7 Length - to store length table data (for Swedish railways).2. CheckFor mathematical check that the data in the areafiles iscorrect.3. Set OutFor setting out points along or parallel to the centre of theroad.4. MeasureFor measuring in existing elements and objects that may liealong the roadline.5. Slope stakingFunction to find out where the ground level intersects with thefinished road and to set out embankment sides.6. Reference pointFunction to set out a point on an optional distance from e.g. aroad edge or for measuring in a point and get data for a ref.pnt. It is also possible to define a boning (guide stake) height.

PRG

39

In general

4.3.136


PRG

39


PRG

39

Store

With this function you store all roadline data, i.e. sectioninterval, centre line offset, section, start- and endpoints of everyelement and the type of element.In order to survey or set out a road in P39 at all, a descriptionof the plane, i.e. the horizontal curve, is required.In order to make a complete description of the vertical spread, aheight curve, two cross sections (left and right road halves) andtwo descriptions of the road camber (super elevation) arerequired. All these tables are described using a number ofelements, where the position of these elements is determined bythe section (station), one section value that denotes where theelement begins and another that denotes where it ends.The section describes ones whereabouts on the road.The section always describes ones whereabouts on the road inthe horizontal plane, even for the vertical descriptions.The elements in the various descriptions are not coupledtogether and will be dealt with separately in the calculations.

All roadline data will be stored in separate areafiles sorted aftertype of data according to the following:

Extension Descriptionnn Section interval and layernn#1 Horizontal alignment (roadline)nn#2 Vertical alignment (height profile)nn#3 Cross sections definition (road profile)nn#4 Cross sections for right road halfnn#5 Cross sections for left road halfnn#6 Camber* information for right road halfnn#7 Camber* information for left road halfnn#8 Length table, for defining kilometre

sections that aren't a kilometre (mainlyfor use on Swedish railways)

*Camber = Super elevation

Store

4.3.137


PRG

39


Requirements

• To work with Program 39 the areafile nn#1 must be stored.

• If you wish to include heights relative to the centre of the road, the areafile nn#2 must be stored.

• If you have defined a cross section and wish to refer the heights to this, the areafiles nn#3, nn#4 and nn#5 must also be stored.

• If you wish to use the camber (super elevation) function, also the area files nn#6 and nn#7 must be stored.

• If you want to use Length tables (mainly for Swedish railways) the area file nn#8 must be stored.

• If you wish to use the layer function, the areafile nn must be stored.

• It is not necessary to define a point code in all files, but it is of great help.

Store

4.3.138


PRG

39


Horizontal alignmentIn order to work with P39 at all, you must have keyed indata for the horizontal alignment of the roadline.This will be stored as section (station), the starting pointcoordinates for the element and possibly a radius or a para-meter for an arc and clothoid.When you store clothoids (spirals) you can choose betweenkeying in A-parameter or to key in radius and length.The roadline must begin and end with a straight element.

The elements on the opposite of a clothoid (spiral) mustdenote the radius in the conjunction. If this is infinite, theelement should be a straight line, otherwise an arc.

The following apply to the figure above:S1: X-coordinate, Y-coordinateS2: X-coordinate, Y-coordinate, RadiusS3: X-coordinate, Y-coordinate, A-parameterS4: X-coordinate, Y-coordinate, RadiusS5: X-coordinate, Y-coordinateS6: X-coordinate, Y-coordinate, RadiusS7: X-coordinate, Y-coordinate, A-parameterS8: X-coordinate, Y-coordinate, RadiusS9: X-coordinate, Y-coordinate

General -Horizontalalignment

S1 S2 S3S4

S5

S6S7 S8

S9

Ref. PntStn. Pnt

4.3.139


PRG

39


The following data is required to describe the different typesof elements for the horizontal alignment of the roadline:

Example of an areafile with a horizontal alignment:

General -Horizontalalignment

Typ Label DescriptionStraight 80 Section (Station)

37 X-coordinate38 Y-coordinate

Arc 80 Section (Station)37 X-coordinate38 Y-coordinate64 Radius, Left=-, Right=+

Clothoid 80 Section (Station)(Spiral) 37 X-coordinate

38 Y-coordinate81 A-parameter*

* You can choose between keying in the A-parameter or radius and length.

80=0.00037=37305.02838=73505.77080=68.48037=37350.63838=73556.85064=750.00080=919.86337=37480.14338=74352.78464=3200.00080=1803.63337=37023.90138=75106.40180=1803.63437=37023.90038=75106.400

4.3.140


PRG

39


Storehorizontalalignment

Roadl.3D 10:171 Store2 Check3 Setout

Store P39 10:171 Roadline2 Vertical alig.3 Cross sect.def

Select program 39 and press ENT.

Select 1 Store.

Since it’s the horizontal alignment youwill store, Select 1 Roadline.

Select in which memory unit you wishto store the horizontal alignment. Inthis case we choose 2 Imem.

Key in the name of the Areafile inwhich you wish to store the roadlineand press ENT.The areafile will automatically get theextension, #1.

Store horizontal alignment

See next page

1

1

PRG 3 9

ENT

Sel.dev. 10:171 Xmem2 Imem

2

P39 10:17

Area=

ENT

4.3.141


PRG

39


Here you can choose how theclothoid (spiral) will be described,stored and calculated; either with anA-parameter or with radius andlength. In this case we choose 1 A-param.

Key in the first section (station)number for the roadline and pressENT.

Key in the Northing value of thechosen and press ENT.

Key in the Easting value of thechosen and press ENT.


From previous page

See next page

ENT

ENT

Clothoid 10:171 A-param2 Radius/Length

P39 10:17

Sect.=_

Note.A-param

P39 10:17

Sect.=XXX.XXXN=

1

ENT

P39 10:17

Sect.=XXX.XXXE=

4.3.142


PRG

39



From previous page

ENT

ENT

ENT

P39 10:17

Sect.=XXX.XXXStraight?

Select type of roadline element bypressing NO until the correct elementtype is displayed. In this example wechoose Straight and press ENT.

Key in the next section (station) pointand repeat the above instructions.

When you are selecting the lastroadline element, select Roadline end.This means that the last element willbe stored as a straight line.

P39 10:17

Sect.=Roadline end?

P39 10:17

Sect.=

4.3.143


PRG

39


Vertical alignmentIf you have chosen to include heights in the calculations forthe roadline, there must be a description of the verticalalignment.The height for the roadline gives a description of the middleline in the vertical plane.A height profile is described by defining height elements withconsecutive section values. The end section (station) of anelement is identical to the start section (station) of the nextelement.The elements can be of the type straight, arc or parabola.

To define a straight element only the height and the section(station) at the start- and end points is required.A circular or a parabel element also require a start slope.This means that you need to enter a start slope if theprevious element type is not a straight line. If a startdirection is stated, this should be used.If the coefficient for a parabola is entered as zero, thecoefficient will be calculated by the program when it is to beused. This requires that a slope exists both before and afterthis parabolic element.

The following apply to the figure above:S=Section (Station)H=HeightR=Radius of circle arcC=Coefficient for a parabola, in the form Y=C*X2.

General -Verticalalignment

S3, H3S1, H1

S2, H2, R

S5, H5S4, H4, R

S6, H6, CS7, H7 S8, H8

H3-H4

S4-S3

4.3.144


PRG

39


The following data is required to describe the differentelement types for the vertical alignment:

Example on a areafile with a height profile:

General -Verticalalignment

Type Label DescriptionStraight 80 Section (Station)

39 ELE, Height

Arc 80 Section (Station)39 ELE, Height44* Start slope, Up=+, Down=-64 Radius, Up=+, Down=-

Parabola 80 Section (Station)39 ELE, Height44* Start slope, Up=+, Down=-84 Coefficient

End 80 Section (Station)39 ELE, Height

* Not mandatory if the previous element type is a straight line.

80=6039=16.00480=8039=15.65780=450.56839=11.58164=800080=746.56839=13.80180=1233.98339=26.47464=-16000..

4.3.145


PRG

39


Storeverticalalignment

Roadl. 3D 10:171 Store2 Check3 Setout



Select 1 Store.

Since it is the vertical alignment youwill store, select 2 Vertical alig.

Key in the name of the areafile inwhich you wish to store the verticalalignment and press ENT.The area file will automatically get theextension, #2.

Select in which memory unit you wishto store the vertical alignment. In thiscase we choose, 2 Imem.

P39 10:17Area=

Store vertical alignment

See next page

1

2

2

ENT

PRG 3 9

ENT

Sel. dev. 10:171 Xmem2 Imem

4.3.146


PRG

39



From previous page

See next page

P39 10:17Sect.=_

P39 10:17Sect.=XXX.XXXELE=

Store P39 10:171 Straight2 Arc3 Parabola

Store 10:171 Straight2 Arc3 Parabola

2

ENT

ENT

1

Select element type, 1 Straight, 2Arc, 3 Parabola or 4 Roadline end.In this case we choose 1 Straight.

Key in the first section (station)number for the roadline and pressENT.

Key in the height value for thechosen section (station) and pressENT.

Select type of element, 1 Straight, 2Arc, 3 Parabola or 4 Roadline end.In this case we choose 2 Arc.

NoteArc

NoteStraight

4.3.147


PRG

39



Key in the second section (station)number for the roadline and pressENT.

Key in height value for the chosensection (station) and press ENT.

Key in the radius of the arc and pressENT. A radius that turns upwards iskeyed in with a positive figure and aradius turning downwards with anegative figure.

Key in a start direction for the arc andpress ENT. Upwards is entered withat positive figure and downwardswith a negative. This display will notbe shown if this data is not required,i.e. if the first element is straight.

From previous page

See next page

ENT

ENT

ENT


P39 10:17Sect.=XXX.XXXELE=Radius=

P39 10:17Sect.=XXX.XXXSlope=Radius=

ENT

P39 10:17Sect.=

NoteRadius:Up=+Down=-

4.3.148


PRG

39



From previous page

See next page

ENT

ENT

3


NoteParabola

Select type of element, 1 Straight, 2Arc, 3 Parabola or 4 Roadline end.In this case we choose 3 Parabola.

Select 1 if you wish to key in aradius for the parabola or 2 if youwish to key in a coefficient. In thiscase we select 2 coefficient.

Key in the third section number forthe roadline and press ENT.

Key in the height value for thechosen section (station) and pressENT.


P39 10:17Sect.=

P39 10:171 Radius2 Coefficient

2

NoteCoeff.

4.3.149


PRG

39



From previous page

Key in a start direction for the para-bola and press ENT. Upwards isentered with at positive figure anddownwards with a negative. Thisdisplay will not be shown if this datais not required, i.e. if the previouselement is straight.

Key in coefficient for the parabolaand press ENT. If you key in 0.000the parabola will be calculated by theprogram provided that theintersection of both lines lies half-waybetween the two points that are aboutto be connected.

Continue to key in the differentelements for the vertical alignment.Select 4 Roadline when you arefinished.

Key in fourth and last section (station)number for the roadline and pressENT. Key in the end section (station)or leave the line blank if you alreadyhave defined the end of the heightcurve. In this case we leave it blank.

P39 10:17Sect.=XXX.XXXSlope=

ENT

P39 10:17Sect.=


P39 10:17Sect.=XXX.XXXSlope=Coeff.=

NoteRoadlineend

4

ENT

ENT

4.3.150


PRG

39


Cross sectionThe cross section is divided in 3 different areafiles; #3, whichcontains all cross section definitions which will be used alongthe road, #4 which describes how the right half of the roadchanges along the road and #5 which describes the samething for the left half of the road.

Cross section definitions (road profiles)The cross section is defined by a number of breakpoints asHorizontal and Vertical offsets (difference in height from theCentre line) and possibly a radius.If a point has a radius and there is another point further on,these two points are joined together with an arc irrespectiveof the direction of the tangent. The tangent direction for theradius in the starting point is defined by the direction for theprevious line. If no start direction exists, the arc will get thestart direction 0, i.e. horizontal direction.A radius turning upwards shall be given a positive sign and aradius turning downwards a negative sign.

An example of the road profile is shown in the figure above:L=Distance from the centre lineH=Height difference from the Centre lineR=Radius of circle arc

General -Crosssection

L1, H1L0, H0

H3

H4

L1

L2

L3

L4

L4, H4, R

slope. 1slope. 4

Centre line

4.3.151


PRG

39


The number of break points that can be used to describe thecross section is limited to 12 per road half. If the first Centreline offset is not equal to zero, it is assumed that the firstpoint lies at a height of zero on the centre line.

It is not necessary to describe point codes for all points, butthe point code is of great help if you wish to search for aspecific point by name.Separate tables are used to describe which cross sections areto be used along a certain part of road. These cross sectiondescriptions will only describe one road half only and canthen be used to describe both the left and right road halves.The points are described below:


Type Label DescriptionCross section 88 Cross section number

Straight 4 Point code83 Centre line offset. Distance

from Centre line to the pointat which the slope or bendshall be defined.

85 Elevation. Difference inheight from the Centre line.

Arc 4 Point code83 Centre line offset. Distance

from Centre line to the pointat which the slope or bendshall be defined.

85 Elevation. Difference inheight from the Centre line.

64 Radius of road profile.Requires a tangent directionat the starting point of thearc if there is no new pointto follow.Up=+, Down=-

4.3.152


PRG

39


Example of an areafile with cross sections:

Cross section definitions for left and right road half (profile curve)Changes in the cross section along the road are stored in twoseparate area files, one for the right and one for the left sideof the road. Reference is made to the predefined profiles inareafile #3.The extension for the right half is #4 and for the left #5.


88=14=183=085=04=283=685=-0.24=383=785=-1.0..

Sect.=80

Sect.=800

Sect.=900

The program willinterpolate a transitionif you define where thecross section 1 endsand where the crosssection 2 starts.

If you don’tdefine where the crosssection 1 ends you willget a steep transitionbetween cross section 1and 2.

4.3.153


PRG

39


If the beginning or end of the road is undefined, i.e. if thestart section (station) for the first cross section is a distancealong the roadline or if the end section (station) is definedbefore the end of the road, the height at the middle of theroad will be valid for the whole of the cross section. If thereis no cross section defined, the latest profile is valid for theremainder of the road.

The cross section definitions are stored as described below:

Example of an areafile with cross section definitions:

Type Label DescriptionStraight 80 Section (Station)

88 Cross section number8088..

Profile transition 80 Section (Station)88 Cross section number80 End of 1:st cross section80 Start of 2:nd cross section88 Cross section number

80=8088=180=80080=90088=280=1800

General -Crosssections

4.3.154


PRG

39


Storecrosssectiondata withdistanceand height

See next page

Store cross section data - with length and height difference



P39 10:17

Area=


Select 1 Store.

Since it is a cross section you willstore, select 3 Cross sect.def.

Key in the name of the areafile inwhich you wish to store the crosssection and press ENT.The areafile will automatically getthe extension, #3.

Select in which memory unit youwish to store the profile. In this casewe select 2 Imem.

1

3

ENT

PRG 3 9

ENT


2

4.3.155


PRG

39



See next page

From previous page

Enter P39 10:171 HT2 Slope

P39 10:171 Straight2 Arc3 Ready

P39 10:17

Pcode=_

P39 10:17

Profil=

Key in the number for the profile youwish to define and press ENT.

Select 1 HT, if you wish to enter theprofile with distance and difference inheight, or 2 Slope, if you wish to enterthe profile with a slope and adistance. In this case we select 1 HT.Note !If you choose alt. 2 you can not enterthe radius but you store data as aslope and the program will calculatethis into a height.

Select type of element, 1 Straight or 2Arc. 3 Ready you choose if you areready with storing cross sections. Inthis case we select 1 Straight.

Here you can key in a code for thepoint. This can then be useful if youwish to search for the point by itscode.

NoteStraight

1

ENT

1

ENT

4.3.156


PRG

39



From previous page

See next page

P39 10:17

Pcode=_

P39 10:17Cl.ofs=Pht=

2

ENT

ENT

P39 10:17Cl.ofs=

ENT

Store P39 10:171 Straight2 Arc3 Ready

Key in the the Centre line offset andpress ENT.

Key in the difference in heightbetween the middle of the road andthe chosen profile and press ENT.

Select type of element, 1 Straight or2 Arc. 3 Ready you choose if you areready with storing cross sections. Inthis case we select 2 Arc.


NoteArc

4.3.157


PRG

39



From previous page

Key in the the Centre line offset andpress ENT.

Key in the difference in heightbetween the middle of the road andthe chosen profile and press ENT.

Key in the radius of the arc and pressENT. A radius that turns upwards iskeyed in with a positive figure and aradius turning downwards with anegative figure.

When you have keyed in all parts ofthe road profile you select 3 Ready.

ENT

ENT

P39 10:17Cl.ofsPht=

P39 10:17Cl.ofs=

ENT

P39 10:17Cl.ofs=Pht=Radius=

NoteRadius:Up=+Down=-

4.3.158


PRG

39


Storecrosssectiondefinitionswith slope

See next page

Store cross section definitions - with slope



P39 10:17

Area=


Select 1 Store.

Since it is a road profile you willstore, select 3 Road profile.

Key in the name of the areafile inwhich you wish to store the profileand press ENT.The areafile will automatically getthe extension, #3.

Select in which memory unit youwish to store the profile. In this casewe select 2 Imem.

1

3

ENT

PRG 3 9

ENT


2

4.3.159


PRG

39



From previous page

Key in the number for the profile youwish to define and press ENT.

Select 1 HT, if you wish to enter theprofile with distance and difference inheight, or 2 Slope, if you wish to enterthe profile with a slope. In this casewe select 2 Slope.Note !If you choose alt. 2 you can not enterthe radius but you store data asdifference in height and the programwill calculate this into a slope.

Proceed with 1 Straight or quitstoring road profiles with 2 Ready. Inthis case we select 1 Straight.


Enter P39 10:171 HT2 Slope

P39 10:171 Straight2 Ready

P39 10:17

Pcode=

NoteStraight

2

1

ENT

P39 10:17

Profil=

ENT

4.3.160


PRG

39



ENT

From previous page

P39 10:17Slope=_

P39 10:17Slope=Cl.Ofs=_

Key in the slope from the middle ofthe road in percent and press ENT.In this case we key in 0.02 which isthe same as a slope of 2%.

Key in the Centre line offset andpress ENT.

When you have keyed in all parts ofthe profile, select 2 Ready.

ENT

NoteSlope:Up=+Down=-

4.3.161


PRG

39


Storecrosssection

See next page

Store cross section


Store P39 10:174 Cross section5 Camber6 Layer

P39 10:17

Area=


Select 1 Store and press ENT.

Since it is a cross section you areabout to store, select 4 Cross section.

Key in the name of the areafile inwhich you wish to store the crosssection and press ENT.

Select in which memory device youwish to store the cross section. Inthis case we select 2 Imem.

1

4

ENT

PRG 3 9

ENT


2

4.3.162


PRG

39


Storecrosssection

From previous page

P39 10:17Sect.=_

P39 10:17Sect.=Profil=

P39 10:171 more2 Ready

2

ENT

ENT

Here you can select which road halfyou shall define, right or left.Press ENT to accept or NO to selectleft. Note -Pressing NO when the leftalternative displayed means that theprogram jumps to the previous menu.)The areafile will automatically get theextension, #4 if you select right or #5if you select left.

Key in the section (station) numberfor the first cross section and pressENT.

Key in the profile that should be validfor the chosen section and press ENT.

Press 1 more if you wish to continuedefining more profiles for the rightroad half or 2 Ready if you arefinished with this half of the road.

P39 10:17

Right ?

ENT

4.3.163


PRG

39


Storecrosssection Key in an end section (station) for

the right half of the road. This canhowever be blank; that means thatthe latest profile is valid for theremainder of the road.

Press ENT to define the left roadhalf or NO to exit.

Continue describing the crosssections for the left half of the roadin the same way as for the right roadhalf.

YES

P39 10:17

Left ?

P39 10:17Sect.=

ENT

From previous page

4.3.164


PRG

39


Camber (Super elevation)The camber (super elevation) defines the slope of the road.The left and right halves of the road are defined separately.When describing how one half of the road changes along theroad, a section (station) and the slope in that section aredefined. If the slope between two sections (stations) ischanging, the slope will gradually change and the correctslope will be obtained in the next section (station).The slope is stated as a decimal (tangent of the slope angle)and is positive upwards and negative downwards based onthe Centre line.

Alternatively, an offset from the Centre line can be enteredand the camber (super elevation) defined from this point (seefig. below).

V

V=camber angle

V

V=camber angle

L0

Centre line

Centre line

General -Camber

4.3.165


PRG

39


General -Camber

The start section (station) of the next element is the endsection (station) of the previous element. The change of theslope within the element will be linear so that it correspondsto the slope of the next element at its start point. If there isno new element, the slope of the last element will beapplicable for the remainder of the roadline.

Data for the camber (super elevation) of the road are storedas follows:

Example of an areafile with camber (super elevation) data:

80=80.00044=0.0180=18083=1.544=0.0380=125044=0.0180=1800..

Type Label DescriptionCamber about 80 Section (Station)Centre line 44 Slope, Up=+, Down=-

Camber with 80 Section (Station)an offset 83 Centre line offset. Distance

from the Centre line towhere the road profileshould slope.

44 Slope, Up=+, Down=-

4.3.166


PRG

39


Storecamberdata

See next page

Store Camber (Super elevation) data



P39 10:17

Area=



Since it is camber data you will store,select 5 Camber (Super elevation).

Key in the name of the areafil inwhich you wish to store camber(super elevation) data and pressENT.

Select in which memory unit youwish to store camber (super eleva-tion) data. In this case we select 2Imem.

5

ENT

PRG 3 9

ENT


2

1 ENT

4.3.167


PRG

39


Storecamberdata

ENT

ENT

ENT

P39 10:17Sect.=_

P39 10:17Sect.=Cl.Ofs=

NoteSlope:Up=+Down=-

P39 10:17

Right ?

Here you can select which road halfyou shall define, right or left.Press ENT to accept or NO to selectleft. Note -Pressing NO when the leftalternative displayed means that theprogram jumps to the previous menu.)The areafile will automatically get theextension, #6 if you select right or #7if you select left.

Key in the first section (station)number for the camber (super eleva-tion) and press ENT.

Key in a Centre line offset aroundwhich the road half should slope andpress ENT. Key in zero if the slopeshould be around the Centre line.

Key in the slope from the start section(station) in percent and press ENT.E.g. 2% should be key in as 0.02.

ENT

From previous page

P39 10:17Sect.=Cl.Ofs=Slope=

4.3.168


PRG

39


Storecamberdata Press 1 more if you wish to continue

storing camber (super elevation) datafor the right road half or 2 Ready ifyou are finished with this road half.

Key in a end section (station) for theright half of the road. This canhowever be blank; that means thatthe latest profile is valid for theremainder of the road.

Press ENT to define the left road halfor NO to exit.

Continue storing the camber data forthe left half of the road in the sameway as for the right road half.

P39 10:17

Left ?

P39 10:17

Sect.=

ENT

YES

2


From previous page

4.3.169


PRG

39


LayersThe road consists of different layers. At startup you can keyin the layer you wish to work with and what point code theroad embankment should have (this to identify the roadway).These layers must be prestored in an areafile.This areafile also contains the layer height. New crosssections will then be calculated continuously. The changeslies in where the roadway intersects with the roadembankment. If the roadway has a slope, the heightdifference from the original cross section will be larger thanthe layer heights, since the layer runs with the slope of theroadway.If no layers are defined, the unmodified cross section will beused.A single roadway gives only one point of intersection. Theroadway in this example has a slope of the angle v.

If the cross section have two embankments, two points ofintersection will be calculated.

General -layers

Differentlayers

Centre line

Layerheight

Newcalculatedintersectionpoint, CL.ofs

Pcode describeswhere the roadembankment is

4.3.170


PRG

39


General -layers

The point code denotes where the road embankment is, i.e.which element that is the road embankment. The programwill search after a point with a given point code and will thenlower the element that ends with the road embankment code.If there are more points with the exact code the last point willbe used (highways can have two road embankments). Theprogram will then calculate new cross section points for theroad embankments. If there are no point code entered or ifthe entered point code does not exist, it is assumed that theroadway begins at the middle of the road.

The different layers for the road are described as follows:

Example of an areafile with layer data:

Type Label DescriptionFirst layer 80 Start section (station)

4 Point code for roadembankment

86 Layer ident., name or no.0 Layer description, e.g.

type of material87 Difference in height from

the road profile

Next layer 86 Layer ident., name or no.0 Layer description, e.g.

type of material87 Difference in height from

the road profile

4=286=10=LAYER187=0.286=20=LAYER287=0.586=30=LAYER387=0.8

4.3.171


PRG

39


Storelayer data

Store Layer data



P39 10:17

Area=



Since it is layer data you are about tostore, select 6 Layer.

Key in the name of the area file inwhich you wish to store layer dataand press ENT.

Select in which memory unit youwish to store layer data. In this casewe select 2 Imem.

See next page

6

ENT

PRG 3 9

ENT


2

1 ENT

4.3.172


PRG

39


Storelayer data

From previous page

Key in the first section number andpress ENT.

Key in a point code for the roadembankment and press ENT.

Key in a identification for the chosenlayer, brief name or number and pressENT.

Key in a description of the layer andpress ENT.

See next page

ENT

ENT

ENT

P39 10:17Sect.=Pcode=_

P39 10:17Layer=

P39 10:17Layer=Info=

P39 10:17Sect.=

ENT

4.3.173


PRG

39


Storelayer data

From previous page

Key in the difference in height to thecross section and press ENT.

Do you wish to continue definingmore layers for the current sectionyou press ENT, otherwise press NO.In this case we press NO.

Press 1 more if you wish to continuedefining layers for other sections or 2Ready if you are finished.

Key in a end section (station) for thekeyed in layer data and press ENT.This can however be blank; thatmeans that the latest layer definitionis valid for the remainder of the road.

P39 10:17

more ?


P39 10:17Sect.=

2

ENT

NO

ENT

P39 10:17Layer=Info=LayerH=

4.3.174


PRG

39


Length table - in generalSwedish railways use a special section definition. Eachsection is described as an even kilometre figure. If a railwaytrack is modified, e.g shortened, the kilometre figures doesno longer correspond with the actual track length. This iswhere the length table comes in use. Here label 80, which inall other RoadLine applications stores section (Sect.) data, isnow used for storing the kilometre figure of the length table.RoadLine section is now stored in label 35 instead.

The length table must always be stored with the fileextention #8.are. This will be done automatically whenkeying in length data from a Geodimeter control unit. Allkilometre data about the length table is stored in label 80.All other Roadline section data (S) now uses label 35 ifLength table is used.

When storing a Lenght table from the Geodimeter controlunit you choose alternative 7 Lenghts from the Store menu.The keying in of length data can be done in two differentways:

35=3+955.364 or35=3 955.364

meaning kilometre no. 3 has a length of 955.364 metres. Thedifference between the two examples is that you can useeither a + sign or a space between the kilometre number andthe length. If you are loading the length table data from acomputer it is best to use the + sign.Note! If you are going to key in a length table from aGeodimeter control unit it is important that you key in thistable (#8.are -file) before any other Roadline data. Otherwisewrong labels will be used for the rest of the Roadlinecalculations.If you transfer length table data from a computer it doesn'tmatter when you do this – the right labels are usedautomatically.

General -Lengthtable

Note! ☛

4.3.175


PRG

39


Example of an areafile with length table data:

80=1 for kilomtre no. 189=1002.892 length of kilometre no. 180=2 for kilometre no. 289=976.475 length of kilometre no. 280=3 for kilometre no. 389=955.364 length of kilomtre no. 3..

General -Lengthtable

4.3.176


PRG

39


StoreLengthdata

Store Length data (mainly used for Swedish railways)


Store P39 10:177 Length8 Exit

P39 10:17

Area=


Select 1 Store and press ENT twice.

Since it is length data you are aboutto store, select 7 Length.

Key in the name of the area file inwhich you wish to store length dataand press ENT.

Select in which memory unit youwish to store layer data. In this casewe select 1 Imem.

See next page

7

ENT

PRG 3 9

ENT

Sel. dev. 10:171 Imem2 Xmem

1

1 ENT ENT

4.3.177


PRG

39


StoreLengthdata

From previous page

Key in the first section number andpress ENT.

Key in actual length for the firstkilometre and press ENT.

Do you want to enter more lengths?Press ENT to add more lengths orNO to exit Length. In this examplewe will enter one more length.

Key in the second section number andpress ENT.

See next page

ENT

ENT

ENT

P39 10:17Sect.=1Length=_

P39 10:17more?

P39 10:17Sect.=

P39 10:17Sect.=

ENT

4.3.178


PRG

39


StoreLengthdata

From previous page

Key in actual length for the secondkilometre and press ENT.

Do you want to enter more lengths?Press ENT to add more lengths orNO to exit Length. In this examplewe are satisfied with 2 lengths andanswer NO.

You are taken back to the Store menuand can now continue with Program39.

ENT

NO

P39 10:17Sect.=2Length=_

P39 10:17more?


4.3.179


PRG

39


StoreLengthdata

The length table must always be stored with the fileextention #8.are. This will be done automatically whenkeying in length data from a Geodimeter Control Unit. Allkilometre data about length tables is stored in label 80. Allother Roadline section data (S) now uses label 35 if Lengthtable is used.

Example of an areafile with length table data:

80=1 for kilomtre no. 189=1002.892 length of kilometre no. 180=2 for kilometre no. 289=976.475 length of kilometre no. 280=3 for kilometre no. 389=955.364 length of kilomtre no. 3..

4.3.180


PRG

39


CheckThis function mathematically checks that the data in theareafiles is correct.All errors in excess of ≥ 20mm horizontally and ≥10mmvertically will be displayed and the element in which theyoccur. The control function will also notify slope deviationslarger than 0.01, i.e. 1%. Errors which occur due to wronglykeyed in data can be easily rectified with the help of Edit.

Note - ErrorA detected error can depend on either keyed in errors orincorrect design of the roadline.

PRG

39

Check


See next page


Select 2 Check and press ENT.

Select which type of object you wishto check. In this case we select 1Roadline. The other options are:2 Vertical alig.3 Cross sect. def.4 Camber (Super elevation)5 Layer6 Length7 All files8 Exit

Check P39 10:171 Roadline2 Vertical alig.3 Cross section

2

1

PRG 3 9

ENT

4.3.181


PRG

39


Check


P39 10:17

Area=

P39 10:17

Elem:1Diff:

Select in which device roadline datais stored. In this case we select 2Imem.

Key in the name of the area file youwish to check and press ENT.

The program check each elementstored.Note !A comparison with the total longitu-dinal centre line measurement ofeach individual section (station) iscarried out. If the final result givesan error message, one or moreelements contain errors in whichcurve length errors are ≥20mm. Re-check the roadline and define theelement with an error. The elementcan be changed with Edit.

From previous page

2

ENT

ENT

4.3.182


PRG

39


SetoutBefore any setting out task can be commenced you will haveto do a free or known station establishment. This is donewith Program 20, Stn Est.After having stored the roadline and thereafter checked thatit is OK you can start with setting out.After keying in section (station) and Centre line offset valuesthe program will calculate bearing and distance to theseroadline points. Three-dimensional setting out of crosssections can be performed if heights have been included inthe station establishment.

Storage of control dataThe coordinate deviations will represent the differencesbetween the stored set out point coordinates and the actualset out point coordinates.This is the basis of the printed out data sheet which will actas proof of having carried out your setting out task to withinthe contract specified accuracy.These deviations (dN, dE, dELE) are much easier to use thancomparing coordinates.If you don’t want to store any control data, clear thesuggested Job file, and press ENT.Control data that will be stored are:

If height measurement is carried out elevations are alsostored (staked elevation). If you wish to store other controldata you can configurate the user defined output table (seepage 4.3).

PRG

39

Setout

Label Description80 (or 35) Section (Station)83 Centre line offset39 ELE86 Layer87 Layer height36 Ht.Ofs40 dN41 dE42 dELE

4.3.183


PRG

39


How to combine countdown to zeroand radial/right angle offset for setting out

In order to benefit most from the inherent intelligence ofyour instrument, we recommend that you try to combine theabove mentioned setting out methods. Here below is anexample:

1. If the setting out data for the first section (station) is OK,press ENT and the instrument will automatically adopt TRKmode. The display will show the calculated bearing and thedHA.

2. Rotate the instrument until the display shows ≈0.0000opposite dHA. With a servo instrument, press .

3. The instrument is now pointing in the direction of thepoint.

4. Guide the prism bearer on line with help of the Tracklight.

5. As soon as the prism comes within the measurement beam,you will see dHD=remaining distance to your set out point.

6. If you are in robotic mode, you can easily translate thedHA and dHD values into Radofs. and RT.ofs to the point.When both these values are 0, the correct lateral set outposition is reached.

Setout

Radofs

RT.ofsdHA

Set out point

Reference-object

Instrument point

Measured pointdHD

4.3.184


PRG

39


Setout

Setout



Select 3 Setout and press ENT.

Key in the job file in which you wishto store the set out point coordinatedeviations.

Select in which memory unit youwish to store the data and pressENT. In this case we select 2 Imem.

Is this the station you chose whenyou ran program 20, prior to P39?If no station establishment has beenmade, P39 will automatically startP20.It is impossible to start with settingout before you have established yourinstrument. In this example weaccept the station and press ENT.

P39 10:17

Job no=_

P39 10:171 Xmem OFF2 Imem OFF3 Serial OFF

STD P39 10:17

Stn=1

See next page

3

ENT

ENT

PRG 3 9

ENT

2 ENT

4.3.185


PRG

39


Setout

Key in the name of the area file inwhich the roadline data is stored andpress ENT.

Select in what type of device inwhich the roadline data is stored. Inthis case we choose 2 Imem.

Do you wish to set out heights? PressENT to accept. If you select not toset out heights the answer will beNO which means that the instrumentheight and the signal height will notbe prompted. In this case we chooseto accept with ENT.

Enter the signal height and pressENT. This question only appears ifyou have chosen to include heights inthe previous display.

P39 10:17

HT Measure?

P39 10:17

SH=

See next page

From previous page


P39 10:17

Area=_

2

ENT

ENT

ENT

4.3.186


PRG

39


Setout

See next page

Key in a boning (guide stake) heightif you wish to move up the set outpoint on the rod and press ENT.

The program checks the elementcombinations. Wait !

If you have chosen to include pointcodes you can key in a code here.The program will choose points withthis code. If you have chosen not toinclude point codes, leave this lineblank and press ENT.

Key in the layer on which you wishto set out the point and press ENTor leave the line blank if you don’twant to work with layers.

From previous page

P39 10:17

Pcode=

P39 10:17

Layer=

P39 10:17


P39 10:17

Ht.Ofs=_

ENT

ENT

ENT

4.3.187


PRG

39


Setout

Is this the correct layer?If not press NO. In this case weaccept with ENT.

Do you want the program tocalculate a new centre line offset, seefig. on page 169, for the roadembankment press ENT, otherwisepress NO and you will work at thesame centre line offset. This displaywill not be shown if you have notdefined a layer.

Select which section interval youshall have in this roadline and pressENT. If you choose this intervalwhen you stored the roadline, theprogram selects that value.

The program suggests the last usedsection (station) in the area file, butthis can easily be changed into anyvalue. In this case we accept thesection (station) with ENT.

See next page

From previous page

ENT

ENT

ENT

P39 10:17

SecInc=

P39 10:17

Sect.=

ENT

P39 10:17

New Cl.ofs ?

P39 10:17Layer:1Descr:LAYER1OK?

4.3.188


PRG

39


Setout-withcountdownto zero Here the layer information is dis-

played for the chosen section. PressENT to proceed.

Now you can select the offset valueyou wish to set out. In this case weselect 0 and press ENT. Is there across section stored will the offsetvalues be taken from this, or by thepoint code.

Is the setting out data OK?If so, press ENT. The instrumentautomatically adopts the TRK-mode.

The instrument should be rotated tothe right 170.3595 degrees.-=Left+=RightThis method is called the countdown to zero angle method. See page4.3.192 for the radial/right anglemethod.

See next page

Setout with countdown to zero

ENT

ENT

P39 10:17

Cl.ofs=

Ok? P39 10:17Sect.:400.000Cl.ofs:0.00Pcode:

TRK P39 10:17HA: 129.8210dHA: 170.3595

ENT

Layerinfo 10:17Layer:1Descr:LAYER1LayerH:0.200

4.3.189


PRG

39


Setout-withcountdownto zero

When the instrument displays≈0.0000 opposite dHA it is pointingin the direction of the point. HA isthe calculated bearing to the point.Measurement tip - for mechanicalWhen using the count down to zeroas your setting out method, it isconvenient to decrease the number ofdecimals in the Label 77=dHA. Thiscan be done via menu 13.

As soon as the prism comes withinthe measurement beam you will seedHD,i.e. how much you must changethe horizontal distance from theinstrument.+=increase-=decreaseIn this case the prism is on line butthe distance has to be increased by2.75m.

When you are finished, i.e.dHD=0.000 you can press REG forthe next point or ENT to see Radofsand RT.ofs. In this case we pressENT.

When the Radofs and RT.ofs are0.000 you have found the correctlateral set out position.

TRK P39 10:17HA: 300.1805dHA: 0.0000

TRK P39 10:17dHA: 0.0000dHD: 2.75dHT: -0.155

TRK P39 10:17Radofs: 0.00RT.ofs: 0.00dHT: 0.000

See next page

ENT

ENT

From previous page

4.3.190


PRG

39



Rotate the instrument with servoIf you press this key without measured distance ELE=the height atthe theoretical set out point.If you press this key with measured distance ELE=the height at themeasured set out point.If you press this key longer than 1 sec. with measured distanceELE=the height at the theoretical set out point.

See next page

TRK P39 10:17dN: 0.00dE: 0.00dELE: 0.000

ENT

From previous page

Note - Skip pointIf during the setting out you havedifficulties in being able to set outthe point, you have a opportunity toskip it. Just turn the instrument untilHD disappears (30cm) and pressREG and the question "Skip Point?"will be displayed. Answer ENT tothis question and the program willcontinue with the next setting outpoint.

When you press REG, these are thevalues which are stored in the Jobfile, i.e. deviations from the correctset out point coordinates. Press ENTto see the coordinates for the point.

Reference-object Radofs

RT.ofsdHA

Set out pointInstrument point

Measured point

dHD

4.3.191


PRG

39



TRK P39 10:17X: 13479.99Y: 21447.22Z: 0.313

P39 10:17

more ?

See next page

These are the actual coordinates ofthe set out point’s present position.Press REG to store the deviationsseen on the previous page.

Do you wish to continue setting outmore points, press ENT. Otherwisepress NO and you will return to themain menu. In this case we continuewith ENT.

-dHT

+dHT

Set out point

REG

ENT

+dELE

-dELE

From previous page

4.3.192


PRG

39


Setout-withradial/right angleoffset The program suggests the next

section (station). Key in the section(station) and the Centre line offsetyou wish to set out…

Is the setting out data OK?If so, press ENT. The instrumentautomatically adopts the TRK-mode.When the prism is found, press ENTto see Radofs and RT.ofs.

When Radofs and RT.ofs are 0.00the correct lateral set out positionhas been found.Press REG directly if you do notwish to see the other display pages.In this case we press ENT to see thecoordinates and deviations.

When you press REG, these are thevalues which are stored in the Jobfile, i.e. deviations from the correctset out point coordinates. Press ENTto see the coordinates for the point.

See next page

P39 10:17

Sect.=420.000

Ok? P39 10:17Sect.: 420.000Cl.ofs:0.00Pcode:

Setout with radial/right angle offset

TRK P39 10:17Radofs: 0.00RT.ofs: 0.00dHT: 0.000

TRK P39 10:17dN: 0.00dE: 0.00dELE: 0.000

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

4.3.193


PRG

39


Setout-withradial/right angleoffset These are the actual coordinates of

the set out point’s present position.Press REG to store the deviationsseen on the previous page.

The program suggests the nextsection (station). Key in the section(station) and the Centre line offsetyou wish to set out…

TRK P39 10:17N: 13479.99E: 21447.22ELE: 0.313

TRK P39 10:17

Sect.=440.000

From previous page

REG

ENT

4.3.194


PRG

39


MeasureThis option enables the operator to localize the section(station), Centre line and the difference in height relative to astored roadline.You simply measure an arbitrary point and the programcalculates the section (station)/Centre line offset andcoordinates of the point. This part of the program isespecially suitable for cross sectioning or localizing anobstacle when checking a planned section of road.

PRG

39

Measure

4.3.195


PRG

39


Measure

Measure

Roadl. 3D 10:174 Measure5 Slopestake6 Ref.Point

Select program 39 and press ENTuntil this display appears.

Select 4 Measure and press ENT.

Key in the Job file in which you wishto store the measured pointcoordinate deviations.

Select in which memory unit youwish to store the Job file and pressENT. In this case we select 2 Imem.


P39 10:17

Job no=_


P39 10:17

Stn=1

See next page

ENT

ENT

PRG 3 9

ENT

2 ENT

4 ENT

4.3.196


PRG

39


Measure


Select in what type of device inwhich the roadline data is stored. Inthis case we choose 2 Imem.

Do you wish to set out heights? PressENT to accept. If you select not toset out heights the answer will beNO which means that the instrumentheight and the signal height will notbe prompted. In this case we chooseto accept with ENT.

Enter the signal height and pressENT. This question only appears ifyou have chosen to include heights inthe previous display.

P39 10:17

HT measure ?

P39 10:17

SH=

See next page

From previous page

ENT

ENT


P39 10:17

Area=_

ENT

2

4.3.197


PRG

39


Measure

The program checks the stored data.Wait !

Key in the layer on which you wishto measure the point and press ENTor leave the line blank if you don’twant to work with layers.

Is this the correct layer?If not press NO. In this case weaccept with ENT.

The instrument is now in theodolitemode.Aim at the first point and press A/Mto start measurement.

See next page

From previous page

STD P39 10:17HA: 76.5600VA: 86.5555

P39 10:17


P39 10:17

Layer=

P39 10:17Layer:1Descr:LAYER1OK?

ENT

ENT

A/M

4.3.198


PRG

39


Measure

Press REG to check the pointslocation according to the roadline.

The program checks if the point laysclose to any of the roadline sections(stations). If no section (station) isfound INFO 32 will be displayed.

Here the layer information is dis-played for the chosen section. PressENT to proceed.

The point lays 16.891m to the left ofthe roadline section (station)804.318. If this is OK, press YES. Ifyou answer NO, the program willcheck if the point lays close to anyother section (station).

See next page

From previous page

STD P39 10:17HA: 76.5600VA: 86.5555SD: 32.685

STD P39 10:17

Wait

Ok? P39 10:17Sect.: 804.318Cl.ofs:-16.891dELE: 0.052

REG

ENT

ENT

Layerinfo 10:17Layer:1Descr:LAYER1LayerH:0.200

4.3.199


PRG

39


Measure

Here you have the opportunity tochoose a point code for the measuredpoint.

Do you wish to continue measuringmore points, press ENT. Otherwisepress NO and you will return to themain menu. In this case we exit withNO.

From previous page

STD P39 10:17

Pcode=DITCH

P39 10:17

more ?

ENT

NO

4.3.200


PRG

39


Slope stakingThis option is used to find out where the ground levelintersects with the finished road and to set out embankmentsides. The heights cannot be deselected, which means that theheight curve for the centre line of the road must exist to beable to run this option, (area files nn#1, nn#2, #3, #4, #5 arerequired).First you have to select the section (station) to work at. Theprogram will calculate N, E, ELE using Cl.Offset=0, and thelast point in the cross section. This results in that a referenceline will be drawn between these two points in the horizontalplane.During the survey you will get continuous information aboutRadofs (Cl.Offset), RT.ofs (Deviation from section (station))and dELE (Deviation from stored cross section).When dELE is zero the Catch point is found.The surveyor can press REG when he thinks he is closeenough to the point.

PRG

39

Slopestake

RT.ofs

Rado

fs Measuredpoint

Catch pntSlope stake

RoadlineReference line

Calculatedheight

Centre line

4.3.201


PRG

39


Slopestake

Slope stake

Roadl. 3D 10:174 Measure5 Slope stake6 Ref.Point


Select 5 Slope stake and press ENT.

Key in the Job file in which you wishto store the measured points dataand press ENT.

Select in which memory unit youwish to store the Job file and pressENT. In this case we select 2 Imem.


P39 10:17

Job no=_


P39 10:17

Stn=_

See next page

ENT

ENT

PRG 3 9

ENT

5 ENT

2 ENT

4.3.202


PRG

39


Slopestake

P39 10:17

Area=_


Select in what type of device theroadline data is stored. In this casewe choose 2 Imem.


Key in a boning (guide stake) heightif you wish to move up the measuredpoint on the rod and press ENT.

See next page

From previous page

ENT

P39 10:17

SH=_

P39 10:17

Ht.Ofs=_


ENT

ENT

2

4.3.203


PRG

39


Slopestake

See next page

The program checks your chosenroadline. Please wait.


Do you know which section (station)is closest to the point you are lookingfor you can key in this and pressENT. Otherwise you leave the lineblank and press ENT and let theprogram calculate in the closestsection (station) to your presentposition.

You are now in theodolite mode andcan start measuring. Aim at theprism to start the measurement.

From previous page

ENT

P39 10:17

SecInc=

ENT

TRK P39 10:17HA: 39.8975VA: 120.8995

P39 10:17

Sect.=

P39 10:17

Roadline checkPlease wait

4.3.204


PRG

39


Slopestake

When the distance has beenmeasured, press REG to check thepoint you stand at.

The program suggests a section(station) on the roadline. Accept thissection with ENT or press NO tolook for another section.

Select an even section (station) oraccept the suggested section (station).In this case we accept the suggestedsection with ENT.

Aim at the prism to see how you lierelative to the current cross section.

See next page

From previous page

ENT

P39 10:17

Sect:OK ?

P39 10:17

Sect.=

ENT

TRK P39 10:17HA: 39.8975VA: 120.8995SD: 9.00

TRK P39 10:17HA:VA:

REG

4.3.205


PRG

39


Slopestake

Here you can see how you lie relativeto the cross section. When bothRT.ofs and dELE are zero you havefound the cross section and can markyour Catch pnt. Press ENT to see thecoordinates for the point or REG tocontinue with the next point.

Press REG to store the point.

Here you have an opportunity tostore a point code for the measuredpoint.

Do you wish to continue looking fornew points press ENT and you cankey in the section (station). In thiscase we choose to exit with NO.

From previous page

P39 10:17

more ?

P39 10:17

Pcode=

TRK P39 10:17N:E:ELE:

REG

ENT

NO

TRK P39 10:17Radofs:RT.ofs:dELE:

ENT

4.3.206


PRG

39


Reference PointThe program can be used to mark out the road design withbonings (guide stakes), i.e. rods with height marks for theroad embankments.This is practical in those cases you have to dig the cut slopeor place material to create the fill, when the bonings (guidestakes) have to be located outside the road embankment.The program can both be used for setting out and surveyingreference points along the roadline.SetoutWhen setting out the operator enters the point code for theroad embankment or the section (station) and centre lineoffset for the reference point, i.e. first the road embankmentand then a distance to where the reference point should belocated. See fig. below. The program uses the direction of theline sloping from the previous break point in the crosssection.Note! dELE runs with the slope of the roadway.

For highways the distance can have to be entered with anegative sign for the road embankment closest the centre lineif this lies in the middle of the two roadhalves.This reference point must be located a bit inside the roadwayif you wish to have a correct height, depending on that theprogram otherwise will use the embankment slope.Setting out two reference heights on the same rod.The program also gives you the opportunity of setting outtwo reference points on the same rod. Default is thatreference point 1 indicates one road embankment and thatreference point 2 indicates the other. See fig. on next side.

PRG

39

Ref. pnt.

Centre line

Distance

RefPoint

Boning height*

*Guide stake height

Point code=Road embankmentDef. point

Point 1

4.3.207


PRG

39


MeasuringWhen measuring the operator enters the section (station) andcentre line offset for the def. point. Then you measure aoptional number of reference points, see fig. below.

Centre line

def.pnt

DHT=0

Ref. point no. 2

Ref. point no. 3

P1

RefPoint2

RefPoint1dELE

Point code=Roadembankment 2Def. point

Point code=Roadembankment 1Def. point

Ref. pnt.Centre line

Distance Boning height*

*Guide stake height

Ref. point no. 1

4.3.208


PRG

39


Ref. pnt.Setout

Reference Point - Setout



Select 6 Ref.Point and press ENT.

Key in the Job file in which you wishto store data for the reference pointsand press ENT.

Select in which memory unit youwish to store data and press ENT. Inthis case we select 2 Imem.


P39 10:17

Job no=_


P39 10:17

Stn=_

See next page

ENT

ENT

PRG 3 9

ENT

6 ENT

2 ENT

4.3.209


PRG

39





Key in the point code for the defini-tion point that has the correct centreline offset and press ENT, or leavethe line blank to enter the Centre lineoffset manually.

See next page

From previous page

Ref. pnt.Setout

ENT

ENT

P39 10:17

Area=_

P39 10:17

SH=_

P39 10:17

Pcode=

ENT


2

4.3.210


PRG

39


Ref. pnt.Setout

See next page


Select which section interval youshall have in this roadline and pressENT. If you chose this interval whenyou stored the roadline, the programselects that value.

Select 1 to set out reference points, 2to measure reference points or 3 toend program. In this case we select 1Setout.

Key in a boning (guide stake) heightif you wish to move up the setoutpoint on the rod and press ENT.

From previous page

P39 10:17

SecInc=

P39 10:17

HT.Ofs=

P39 10:171 Setout2 Measure3 Exit

NoteSetout

1

ENT

ENT

P39 10:17


4.3.211


PRG

39


Ref. pnt.Setout

See next page

Press ENT if you wish to set out twoelevations on the same rod. In thiscase we press NO to set out only onepoint.

Do you know which section (station)is closest to the point you are aboutto set out you can key in this andpress ENT. Otherwise you leave theline blank and press ENT and let theprogram calculate the closest section(station) to your position.

Aim at the prism and press the A/M-key to start the measurement.

Press REG to store the measurement.

P39 10:17

Sect.=_

STD P39 10:17HA:VA:

STD P39 10:17HA:VA:SD:

REG

A/M

ENT

P39 10:17

Dual elevations?

NO

From previous page

4.3.212


PRG

39


Ref. pnt.Setout

See next page

The program suggests a section(station) on the roadline. Accept thissection (station) with ENT or pressNO to look for another section(station).

Select an even section (station) oraccept the suggested section (station).In this case we accept the suggestedsection (station) with ENT.

If you have keyed in the point codefor the definition point the programsuggests a centre line offset.Otherwise you will have to key inthe correct centre line offset. PressENT or key in a new value.

Is the definition point data OK?If so, press ENT, otherwise pressNO. In this case we press ENT.

ENT

ENT

ENT

P39 10:17

Cl.Ofs=

Ok? P39 10:17Sect.=Cl.ofs=Pcode=

P39 10:17

Sect.=

ENT

STD P39 10:17

Sect.=OK?

From previous page

4.3.213


PRG

39


Ref. pnt.Setout

Key in a number for the referencepoint you are going to set out.

Key in the distance that is validbetween the definition point and thepoint you are going to set out andpress ENT.

The program automatically adoptsTRK-mode. Aim to the prism to startthe measurement.

As soon as the prism comes withinthe measurement beam you will seedHD,i.e. how much you must changethe horizontal distance from theinstrument.+=increase-=decreaseWhen you think that you are closeenough to zero, press REG toregister the point or press ENT ifyou wish to set out with the radial/right angle offset method.

From previous page

ENT

See next page

P39 10:17

Dist.=

TRK P39 10:17HA:dHA:

P39 10:17

Pno=

ENT

REG

TRK P39 10:17dHA:dHD:dHT:

4.3.214


PRG

39


Ref. pnt.Setoutof 2 pnt. Do you wish to set out more

reference points for this section pressENT and you are able to key in anew point number and a newdistance. In this case we press NO.

Do you wish to set out new referencepoints for another section pressENT. That means that you are ableto key in a new section (station)number. In this case we choose toexit with NO, in order to set out tworeference points.

Select 1 to set out reference points,2to measure reference points or 3 toend program. In this case we select 1Setout.

Key in a boning (guide stake) heightif you wish to move up the setoutpoint on the rod and press ENT.

From previous page

See next page

P39 10:17

New def.pnt?

P39 10:17

Ht.Ofs=


1

NO

ENT

NO

P39 10:17

more?

4.3.215


PRG

39


Ref. pnt.Setoutof 2 pnt.

See next page

Press ENT if you wish to set out twoelevations on the same rod. In thiscase we press ENT.

Do you know which section (station)is closest to the point you are aboutto set out you can key in this andpress ENT. Otherwise you leave theline blank and press ENT and let theprogram calculate the closest section(station) to your position.

Aim at the prism and press the A/M-key to start the measurement.

Press REG to store the measurement.

ENT

ENT

ENT

P39 10:17

Sect.=

STD P39 10:17HA:VA:


ENT

P39 10:17

Dual elevations?

From previous page

4.3.216


PRG

39



See next page

The program suggests the section(station) that lies closest to themeasured point. Accept this section(station) with ENT or press NO tokey in a new section (station).




ENT

ENT

ENT


P39 10:17

Sect.=

P39 10:17

Cl.ofs=

ENT

P39 10:17

Sect.=OK?

From previous page

4.3.217


PRG

39



Key in a number for the referencepoint you are going to set out.

Key in the distance that is validbetween the definition point and thepoint you are going to set out andpress ENT.

The program automatically adoptsTRK-mode. Aim to the prism to startthe measurement.

From previous page

ENT

P39 10:17

Pno=

P39 10:17

Dist.=

TRK P39 10:17HA:dHA:

ENT

See next page

4.3.218


PRG

39



See next page

From previous page

ENT

ENT

TRK P39 10:17dHA:dHD:dHT:

P39 10:17

Cl.ofs=-X.XX

REG

ENT

As soon as the prism comes withinthe measurement beam you will seedHD,i.e. how much you must changethe horizontal distance from theinstrument.+=increase-=decreaseWhen you think that you are closeenough to zero, press REG toregister the point or press ENT ifyou wish to set out with the radial/right angle offset method.

The program suggests the centre lineoffset for the other road half which isvalid for the second definition point.Press ENT.


Here is the difference in heightbetween the first and the secondreference point. Press ENT.

P39 10:17

dELE=


4.3.219


PRG

39



From previous page


P39 10:17

New def.pnt?

NO

3

Do you wish to set out morereference points for another section(station) press ENT and you are ableto key in a new section (station)number. In this case we press NO.

Select 1 to set out reference points, 2to measure reference points or 3 toend program. In this case we select 3Exit.

4.3.220


PRG

39


Ref. pnt.Measure

Reference Point - Measure



Select 6 Ref.Point and press ENT.

Key in the Job file in which you wishto store data for the reference pointsand press ENT.

Select in which memory unit youwish to store data and press ENT. Inthis case we select 2 Imem.


P39 10:17

Job no=_


P39 10:17

Stn=1

See next page

ENT

ENT

PRG 3 9

ENT

6 ENT

2 ENT

4.3.221


PRG

39


Ref. pnt.Measure

P39 10:17

Area=_




Key in the point code for the def.point that has the correct centre lineoffset and press ENT, or leave theline blank to enter the Centre lineoffset manually.

See next page

From previous page

ENT

ENT

P39 10:17

SH=_

P39 10:17

Pcode=

ENT


2

4.3.222


PRG

39


Ref. pnt.Measure

See next page



Select 1 to set out reference points, 2to measure reference points or 3 toend program. In this case we select 2Measure.

Do you know which section (station)is closest to the point you are lookingfor you can key in this and pressENT. Otherwise you leave the lineblank and press ENT and let theprogram calculate the section (sta-tion) closes to your position.

From previous page

ENT

P39 10:17

Sec.Inc=

P39 10:17

Sect.=


NoteMeasure

P39 10:17


ENT

2

ENT

4.3.223


PRG

39


Ref. pnt.Measure

Aim to the prism and press A/M tostart the measurement.

When the distance has beenmeasured, press REG to check thepoint you stand at.

The program suggests a section(station) on the roadline. Accept thissection (station) with ENT or pressNO to look for another section(station).


See next page

From previous page


P39 10:17

Sect.=

P39 10:17

Sect.=OK?

STD P39 10:17HA:VA:

REG

ENT

ENT

A/M

4.3.224


PRG

39


Ref. pnt.Measure



Key in a number for the referencepoint.

From previous page


P39 10:17

Pno=

ENT

ENT

P39 10:17

Cl.ofs=

ENT

See next page

4.3.225


PRG

39


Ref. pnt.Measure

Aim at the prism and press A/M tostart the measurement.

When the prism has been found,press REG to register themeasurement.

Here you can see the correct bearingfor the measured point, the distanceand the difference in height from thereference point. Press ENT to acceptthis or NO to ignore.

Do you wish to measure morereference points for the currentsection press ENT and you are ableto key in a new point number.In this case we press NO.


P39 10:17

more?

Ok? P39 10:17HA:HD:dELE:

ENT

NO

REG

STD P39 10:17HA:VA:

A/M

From previous page

4.3.226


PRG

39


Ref. pnt.Measure

Do you wish to measure referencepoints for another section press ENT.That means that you are able to keyin a new section number. In this casewe choose to exit with NO.

Select 1 to set out reference points, 2to measure reference points or 3 toend program. In this case we select 3Exit.


3

P39 10:17

New def.pnt?

NO

From previous page

4.3.227


PRG

39


Registereddata

Job file Label

3 Setout

Section 80Centre line offs. 83ELE 39Layer 86Layerheight 87Ht.Ofs. 36dN 40dE 41dELE 42

4 Measure

Section 80Centre line offs. 83dELE 42Pcode 4Layer 86Layerheight 87N 37E 38ELE 39

5 Slopestake

Section 80Pcode 4Ht.Ofs 36Radofs 72RT.ofs 73dELE 42N 37E 38ELE 39

The list below shows which data will be stored afterregistration. See the configuration part if you wish to storeother data.

Job file Label

6 Reference pnt

1 Setout,one ref. pointSection 80Centre line offs. 83Pno 5Ht.Ofs 36Distance 89dN 40dE 41dELE 42

1 Setout,two ref. pointsSame data as forone ref. point+Centre line offs. 83dELE 42

2 MeasureSection 80Centre line offs. 83E 39Pno 5HA 7HD 11dELE 42

4.3.228

PRG

27

PROGRAM 27 - MOVING COORDINATES FORWARDFIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

Program 27 - Moving Coordinates ForwardMoving Coordinates Forward is a program for movingcoordinates forward from a known station.

Please note that no calculations will be performed, but theprogram will store everything in the memory for laterPC processing.

4.3.229

PRG

27


Program 27 - Moving Coordinates Forward


How touse Here you key in the number or name

of the Job file in which you wish tostore your traverse data. A list of datastored in the selected Job file can beseen on page 4.3.240. Select, forexample, Job no = 2.



Here you have the opportunity tochoose a Pcode for the station point.If you don't wish to have any Pcodeleave the line blank and press ENT.

Here you select if you want to use"known station" with one referenceobject or "known station+" withmore reference objects. In thisexample we'll chose "1 Knownstation". Press 1.

PRG 27 ENT

P27 10:17

Stn=

2 ENT

ENT2

1101 ENT

ENT

P27 10:17

Pcode =

P27 10:16

Job no =

Note ! ☛KnownStation+ isdescribedon page4.3.12

P27 10:171 Known station2 Known station+

1

4.3.230

PRG

27


See next page.

Key in the name of the Area file inwhich you have stored your stationpoint and your reference object.If you leave the line blank you areable to enter the coordinates manu-ally.


Enter the coordinates manually

Enter your station coordinates.Leave the ELE blank for no heightestablishment.

Are your coordinates correct? PressYes (ENT) to accept them. If youpress No you will return to thequestion about Stn= and Area=. If thecoordinates have to be changed, useEdit or P43 (Enter Coordinates). Inthis example we will continue byaccepting them.


Stn ok ?N=xxxxE=xxxxELE=xx

How touse -Known stn


ENT

2

From previous page

If you left "Area="blank you're taken

here

Note ! ☛Enter thecoordi-natesmanually

ENT2

P27 10:17

Area =

4.3.231

PRG

27


From previous page.

ENT

Are you going to measure heights?Accept this question by pressing ENT(Yes). If you decide not to measureheights (press No) it means that theinstrument height (IH) and signalheight (SH) will be ignored.In this example, we will be measuringheights. Press ENT.




Are your coordinates correct? PressENT to accept them. If you press Noyou return to the question Ref.Obj=.If they have to be changed, use Editor P43 (Enter Coordinates). We willcontinue by accepting them.

How touse

Note ! ☛Onlyshown ifyourcoordinatesincludesELE.

10:18

IH =

RefObj=

Area =


1.75 ENT

1102 ENT

See next page

ENT

ENT

HT measure ?Note ! ☛


4.3.232

PRG

27


From previous page

Aim at your reference object. Thenpress the A/M key.

HAref is the calculated bearingbetween the station point and thereference object.If you wish to check the distance tothe reference object, press ENT.Otherwise press REG to store thestation establishment and exit.

If the reference object is marked witha reflector, you can also check thehorizontal distance by pressing theA/M key. Otherwise press REG tostore the station establishment andexit.

Here you can compare the calculateddistance with the actual measureddistance. Press REG to store stationestablishment in the Job file you havechosen (see page 4.3.229).Note ! The REG key must always beused if you want to store the stationestablishment. Press REG to continuewith Program 27.

Aim at refobjPress A/M

STD P27 10:18HAref:xx.xxxxHA: xx.xxxxREG=Exit

STD P27 10:18SHD: xxx.xxxHD :REG=Exit

STD P27 10:19SHD: xxx.xxxHD : xxx.xxxREG=Exit

A/M

ENT

A/M

REG

How touse

Note ! ☛PressREG

ENT

4.3.233

PRG

27


Foresight measurement

Choose 1 Foresight.See page 4.3.235 for Other. Chooseoption 2 Refobj. if you wish tomeasure more angles. (Not first shot!)

Key in the foresight point number.

Here you have the opportunity tochoose a Pcode for the foresightpoint. If you don't wish to have anyPcode leave the line blank and pressENT.


Foresightmeasure-ment P27 10:19

1 Foresight2 Refobj.3 Other

1

P27 10:19

Pno=

P27 10:19

Pcode=

ENT2

ENT

P27 10:19

SH=

From previous page

ENT

See next page.

4.3.234

PRG

27


From previous page.

STD 10:21HA:xxx.xxxVA:xxx.xxx

The instrument is now in theodoliteposition and is ready to measure. Aimat the chosen target. Press the A/Mkey to measure the distance.

Note !It is possible to measure in all modes(STD, FSTD, TRK, D-bar) and inboth faces.


See page 4.3.241 for a list of what isstored in the memory.

Do you wish to measure more pointspress YES. Press NO to exit theprogram. Answer NO to the question"End" if you're not finished.

Foresightmeasure-ment

A/M

STD 10:21HA:xxx.xxxVA:xxx.xxxSD:xxx.xx

REG

P27 10:21

more ?

NO

P27 10:21

End ?

P27 10:211 Foresight2 Refobj.3 Other

YES

See next pageSee page 4.3.238

4.3.235

PRG

27


Other measurement

Choose 3 OtherSee page 4.3.233 for Foresight.

Choose measuring mode.

Othermeasure-ment P27 10:19

1 Foresight2 Refobj.3 Other

3

From previous page

P27 10:191 Benchmark2 Close3 Sideshot

1 2 3

Enter the bench-mark elevation forthe point

Enter the activitycode for the side-shot.

See page 4.3.237

ENT ENT

See page 4.3.237

P27 10:19

BM ELE=

P27 10:19

Active=

See next page

Note ! ☛Theavailablemenuchoicesbelowdoes notperformanycalcula-tions, butwill onlystoreinforma-tion inmemoryfor latercomputerproces-sing.

4.3.236

PRG

27


From previous page

P27 10:191 External2 Internal3 Other

Choose the method toclose the traverse.

See next page

P27 10:191 Point to point2 Open

3 1 or 2

See next page

Close External (CE) Close Internal (CI)

Point to point (P) Open (O)

4.3.237

PRG

27


P27 10:19

Pcode=

P27 10:19

Pno=

ENT

ENT2

Enter the point number.

Here you have the opportunity tochoose a Pcode for the point. If youdon't wish to have any Pcode leavethe line blank and press ENT.


The instrument is now in theodoliteposition and is ready to measure.Aim at the chosen target. Press theA/M key to measure the distance.Note !It is possible to measure in allmodes (STD, FSTD, TRK, D-bar)and in both faces.

The instrument displays HA, VAand SD for your first point. Yourmeasurement can now be registered.Press the REG key.See page 4.3.242 for a list of what isstored in the memory

STD 10:21HA:xxx.xxxVA:xxx.xxx

A/M

STD 10:21HA:xxx.xxxVA:xxx.xxxSD:xxx.xx

P27 10:21

SH=

ENT

REG

Othermeasure-ment

4.3.238

PRG

27


Othermeasure-ment

Do you wish to measure more pointspress YES. Press NO to exit theprogram. Answer NO to the question"End" if you're not finished.

If you wish to re-measure aforesight point press 1. Youwill then get an info message"Info 55" and a question"New foresight".Press 3 to measure otherpoints.

The instrument returns to program 0.See next page for instructions of howto start the program on the nextstation.

P27 10:21

more ?

NO

P27 10:21

End ?

P27 10:211 Foresight2 Refobj.3 Other

YES

Note ! ☛Thisquestionwill notappear ifyou havechosen toclose. NO

P0 10:21

Temp=20.0_

See next page

4.3.239

PRG

27


P27 10:211 New2 Continue

2

Start program 27

Choose 1 if you wish to start a newor choose 2 if you wish to continuewith the old.

Aim at your reference object andpress A/M.

Press A/M and REG if distance is tobe measured, otherwise press onlyREG.

STD P27 10:21HA:xxx.xxVA:xxx.xx

27PRG

A/M

REG

See page 4.3.231

Nextstation

P27 10:21

Aim at refobjPress A/M

4.3.240

PRG

27


Registereddata

Job file Comments

First Station using one reference object

Text LabelActivity OS 61Pno (STN) 5Pcode 4IH 3Coordinates 37,38,39Activity RO 61Pno (Ref.Obj) 5Coordinates 37,38,39HA_ref 21Raw data 7,8,(9)

Text LabelStn 2Coordinates 37,38,39Pno (STN) 5SH (6)Coordinates 37,38,39Raw data 7,8,(9)Pno.Info, Weighting 0Info, Diff HA 0Info, Point list 0Pno 5(dHD) (76)dHA 45Pno.Activity OS 61Pno (STN) 5Pcode 4IH 3Coordinates 37,38,39Activity RO 61Pno Blank 5Coordinates, 0.000

37,38,(39)HA_ref 21

Raw data 7,8,(9)

DescriptionStation data

Stored if enteredStored if heights are included39 if heights are includedReference object data

39 if heights are included(Set HA)Stored if distance is measured

DescriptionPoint number for station39 if heights are includedFirst point

39 if heights are includedPolar dataLike first point

First pointDeviation from true HD

Like first point

Occupied Station

Reference Objectno number

Values = 0.000Instrument direction when exiting StationEstablishment

First Station using more than one reference object

4.3.241

PRG

27


Registereddata

Job file Comments

Text LabelActivity FS 61Pno 5Pcode 4SH 6N 37E 38ELE 39HA 7VA 8SD 9HAII 17VAII 18HAI 24VAI 25

Foresight

DescriptionForesight data

Stored if enteredStored if heights are measured

Stored if heights are measured

Stored if measured in two faces (STD, D-bar)Stored if measured in two faces (D-bar)-"-

Next Station

Text LabelActivity OS 61Pno (STN) 5Pcode 4IH 3N (STN) 37E (STN) 38ELE (STN) 39Activity RO 61Pno (Ref.Obj) 5Pcode 4SH 6N (RO) 37E (RO) 38ELE (RO) 39HA_ref 21HA 7VA 8SD 9HAII 17VAII 18HAI 24VAI 25

DescriptionStation data

Stored if enteredStored if heights are included

Stored if heights are includedReference object data

Stored if enteredStored if heights are included

Stored if heights are includedStored if distance is not measured

Stored if distance is measuredStored if measured in two faces (STD, D-bar)Stored if measured in two faces (D-bar)-"-

4.3.242

PRG

27


Registereddata

Job file Comments

Text LabelActivity RO 61Pno 5Pcode 4SH 6N 37E 38ELE 39HA 7VA 8SD 9HAII 17VAII 18HAI 24VAI 25

Refobj.

DescriptionReference object data

Stored if enteredStored if heights are measured


Stored if distance is measuredStored if measured in two faces (STD, D-bar)Stored if measured in two faces (D-bar)-"-

Benchmark, Sideshot, Close

Text LabelActivity * 61Pno 5Pcode 4SH 6BM ELE 31N 37E 38ELE 39HA 7VA 8SD 9HAII 17VAII 18HAI 24VAI 25

Description

Stored if enteredStored if heights are measuredStore if BM ELE has been chosen


Stored if measured in two faces (STD, D-bar)Stored if measured in two faces (D-bar)-"-* Activity codes: Sideshot = optional Benchmark = BMClose: External = CE Internal = CI Point to point = P Open = O

4.3.243

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

PRG

61


Program 61 - COGO

In general 4.3.2441-Line intersections 4.3.246

1.1-Intersection between lines 4.3.2461.2-Offset intersection 4.3.2521.3-Offset through points 4.3.2591.4-Right angle intersection 4.3.267

2-Curve intersections 4.3.2752.1-Points on a curve 4.3.2752.2-Curve intersection 4.3.281

3-Miscellaneous 4.3.2863.1-Perpendicular offset 4.3.2863.2-Centre of circle 4.3.2913.3-Station and offset 4.3.2963.4-Angle and distance 4.3.301

Configuration 4.3.306

4.3.244


PRG

61

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

PRG

61

Ingeneral

In generalProgram 61, COGO, is calculation program for solvingcoordinate calculations in field or in the office. It is divided intothree main sections, Line intersections, Curve intersections andMiscellaneous. These sections then include a number ofsubsections depending on the current condition and the typeof base information you have. The program also includes ageneral Configuration part which configures the programbehaviour. Please go through this part before you start.When you have calculated a point you can also set it outwithout leaving the program.To help you understand the diffe-rent calculation programs, we have choosen to illustrate theseby the following figures:

1

25

7

1

25

7

1

2

34

5

7

1

2

345

7

1

3

5

1

5

1

3

5

1

3

5

1

5

1

5

1.1 - Intersection between lines 1.2 Offset intersection

1.3 Offset through points 1.4 Right angle intersect.

2.1 Points on a curve 2.2 Curve intersection

3.1 Perpendicular offset 3.2 Centre of a circle

3.3 Station and offset 3.4 Angle and distance

4.3.245

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

PRG

61


Coordinate listIn the following examples we have chosen to use an examplefrom real life. Here below you can find a list of the pointcoordinates:

Pno N E

1 88345.862 99136.8792 88343.971 99153.5273 88313.151 99157.1734 88296.446 99155.2775 88279.753 99153.3756 88273.289 99145.4287 88276.149 99120.184

Fetching point data from an Area fileIn the following examples you can use pre-stored point data.You will then be prompted to enter in which Area file thesepoints are stored and in which memory device, Imem,Cardmem or Xmem. To speed up this process you canconfigure the program to use the first entered Area andmemory for the following points.

To simplify the manual and also to use less paper, we havechosen not to show every display that concerns the Area andmemory. Instead of these displays we will show the followingtext block. This means that you are able to key in the Areafile you wish to fetch point coordinates from and also toenter in which memory device this file is stored:

Ingeneral

Enter Area &Select device

4.3.246


PRG

61

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

Calculatedpoint

1

25

7PRG

61

Lineinter-sections

Line intersections

1.1 - Intersection between linesThis program calculates the intersection between the lines A-Band C-D.

Point A

Point B

Point D

Point C

Select 10:171 Line intersec.2 Curve inters.3 Miscellaneous

Select 10:171 Int. b/w lines2 Offs.intersec.3 Offs. thr. pts

1

1

PRG 6 1

ENT


Select 1 (Line intersec.).

Select 1 (Int. b/w lines)

See next page

4.3.247

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

PRG

61


1.1-Inter-sectionbetweenlines

P61 10:17Point APno=_

P61 10:17

Area=_

Key in the point number for point Aand press ENT.

Key in the name of the Area file inwhich the points are stored and pressENT. If you wish to key in thecoordinates manually, leave the lineblank and press ENT.In this case we have stored the pointsin Area no 1.

Select in which memory unit you havestored the Area file and press ENT.

Press ENT the accept the chosenpoint or NO to choose another point.

See next page

1

1

Sel.dev. 10:171 Imem2 Xmem

2

P61 10:17Ok?N=88345.862E=99136.879

ENT

From previous page

ENT

ENT

ENT

4.3.248


PRG

61

PROGRAM 61 - COGO


P61 10:17Point BPno=_

Key in the point number for point Band press ENT.


Key in the point number for point Cand press ENT.

See next page

5

From previous page

ENT


P61 10:17Ok?N=88279.753E=99153.375

ENT

P61 10:17Point CPno=_

7 ENT

4.3.249

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

PRG

61




Key in the point number for point Dand press ENT.

See next page

P61 10:17Ok?N=88276.149E=99120.184

ENT

From previous page

P61 10:17Point DPno=_

2 ENT



4.3.250


PRG

61

PROGRAM 61 - COGO



This is the calculated pointcoordinates. Press ENT to store thepoint or NO to cancel.

Key in a number for the calculatedpoint and press ENT.

Key in the name of the Areafile inwhich you wish to store the calculatedpoint and press ENT.

See next page

P61 10:17Ok?N=88343.971E=99153.527

From previous page

P61 10:17N=88322.145E=99142.797Store?

P61 10:17

Pno=_

ENT

ENT

P61 10:17

Area=_

ENT

4.3.251

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

PRG

61



Here you have the opportunity tochoose a Pcode for the calculatedpoint. In this case we choose the callthe point "TP".

Do you wish to add an elevation tothe point before you store it? If so,press ENT, otherwise press NO.

Accept the keyed in elevation withENT or press NO to reenter it.

Now you return to the Lineintersection menu. If you wish to stepto the main menu, press 6.

P61 10:17Pcode=

From previous page

ENT

ENT

ENT

P61 10:17Pcode=TPELE=?

P61 10:17Pcode=TPELE=12.125

P61 10:17

Point stored


4.3.252


PRG

61

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

1.2-Offsetinter-section

Calculatedpoint

1

25

7

1.2 - Offset intersectionThis program calculates the intersection between the lines A-Band C-D if they are dislocated with two offsets, Dist. from ABand Dist. from CD.

Point A

Point BPoint D

Point C



1

2

PRG 6 1

ENT



Select 2 (Offs. intersec.)

See next page

Dist. from AB

Dist. from CD

4.3.253

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

PRG

61


5 ENT






See next page

1

P61 10:17Ok?N=88345.862E=99136.879

ENT

From previous page

ENT



4.3.254


PRG

61

PROGRAM 61 - COGO



Key in the offset, Dist. from AB andpress ENT. A positive value meansthat you are dislocating the line at theright from point A. In this examplewe have chosen the offset +1m.


See next page

P61 10:17Ok?N=88279.753E=99153.375

ENT

From previous page


7 ENT

P61 10:17Offs. intersec.Dist. from ABDist.=

1 ENT


4.3.255

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

PRG

61


2 ENT


Press ENT to accept the chosen pointor NO to choose another point.


See next page

From previous page

P61 10:17Ok?N=88276.149E=99120.184


ENT



4.3.256


PRG

61

PROGRAM 61 - COGO


Press ENT to accept the chosen pointor NO to choose another point.

Key in the offset, Dist. from CD andpress ENT. A positive value meansthat you are dislocating the line at theright from point C. In this examplewe have chosen the offset -1m.



See next page

ENT

From previous page

ENT

ENT

ENT

P61 10:17N=88322.258E=99141.738Store?

P61 10:17

Pno=_

P61 10:17Ok?N=88343.971E=99153.527

P61 10:17Offs. intersec.Dist. from CDDist.=

1-

4.3.257

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

PRG

61







See next page

P61 10:17

Area=_

P61 10:17Pcode=

ENT

From previous page

ENT

ENT

ENT



4.3.258


PRG

61

PROGRAM 61 - COGO



P61 10:17

Point stored


From previous page

4.3.259

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

PRG

61


1

2

34

5

7

Calculatedpoint

1.3 - Offset through pointsThis program calculates the intersection between the lines A-Band C-D if they are dislocated to the points E resp. F.

Point A

Point D



1

3

PRG 6 1

ENT



Select 3 (Offs. thr. pts)

See next page

1.3-Offsetthroughpoints

Point C

Point B

Point F Point E

4.3.260


PRG

61

PROGRAM 61 - COGO






See next page

1

P61 10:17Ok?N=88345.862E=99136.879

From previous page

ENT


5 ENT


4.3.261

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

PRG

61


3 ENT



Key in the point number for point Eand press ENT.

See next page

P61 10:17Ok?N=88279.753E=99153.375

ENT

From previous page

P61 10:17Point EPno=_



4.3.262


PRG

61

PROGRAM 61 - COGO





See next page

From previous page

P61 10:17Ok?N=88313.151E=99157.173

ENT


7

P61 10:17Ok?N=88276.149E=99120.184

ENT

ENT


4.3.263

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

PRG

61


4 ENT




Key in the point number for point Fand press ENT.

See next page

From previous page


2 ENT

P61 10:17Ok?N=88343.971E=99153.527

ENT

P61 10:17Point FPno=_


4.3.264


PRG

61

PROGRAM 61 - COGO





See next page

P61 10:17Ok?N=88296.446E=99155.277

ENT

From previous page

P61 10:17N=88304.628E=99159.299Store?

P61 10:17

Pno=_

ENT

ENT


4.3.265

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

PRG

61







See next page

P61 10:17

Area=_

P61 10:17Pcode=

ENT

From previous page

ENT



ENT

ENT

4.3.266


PRG

61

PROGRAM 61 - COGO



P61 10:17

Point stored


From previous page

4.3.267

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

PRG

61


1

2

345

7

1.4-Rightangleïnter-section

Calculated point

1.4 - Right angle intersectionThis program calculates the intersection between the line goingthrough point E, perpendicular to the line A-B, and the linegoing through point F, perpendicular to the line C-D.

Point A

Point D


Select 10:174 Rt ang. int.5 Config.6 Main menu

1

4

PRG 6 1

ENT


Select 1 (Line intersec.) and pressENT.*

Select 4 (Rt ang. int.)*

* You can also press 1 and 4 directly.

See next page

Point EPoint F

Point C

Point B

ENT

4.3.268


PRG

61

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

1.4-Rightangleinter-section





See next page

1

P61 10:17Ok?N=88345.862E=99136.879

ENT

From previous page

ENT


5 ENT


4.3.269

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

PRG

61


3 ENT



Key in the point number for point Eand press ENT.

See next page

P61 10:17Ok?N=88279.753E=99153.375

ENT

From previous page

P61 10:17Point EPno=_



4.3.270


PRG

61

PROGRAM 61 - COGO





See next page

From previous page

P61 10:17Ok?N=88313.151E=99157.173

ENT


7

P61 10:17Ok?N=88276.149E=99120.184

ENT

ENT


4.3.271

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

PRG

61


4 ENT




Key in the point number for point Fand press ENT.

See next page

From previous page


2 ENT

P61 10:17Ok?N=88343.971E=99153.527

ENT

P61 10:17Point FPno=_


4.3.272


PRG

61

PROGRAM 61 - COGO





See next page

P61 10:17Ok?N=88296.446E=99155.277

ENT

From previous page

P61 10:17N=88307.213E=99133.376Store?

P61 10:17

Pno=_

ENT

ENT


4.3.273

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

PRG

61







See next page

P61 10:17

Area=_

P61 10:17Pcode=

ENT

From previous page

ENT



ENT

ENT

4.3.274


PRG

61

PROGRAM 61 - COGO



P61 10:17

Point stored


From previous page

4.3.275

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

PRG

61


Calculatedpoint

1

3

5

PRG

61

Curveinter-sections

Curve intersections

2.1 - Points on a curveThis program calculates the intersection between the line A-Band the circle at the center of point C and with a radius of,"Radius from C".

Point A

Point BRadius from C

Point C


Select 10:171 Pts on a curve2 Curve inters.3 Config

2

1

PRG 6 1

ENT


Select 2 (Curve intersec.).

Select 1 (Pts on a curve)

See next page

Calculatedpoint

4.3.276


PRG

61

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

2.1-Pointson a curve





See next page

1

P61 10:17Ok?N=88345.862E=99136.879

ENT

From previous page

ENT


5 ENT


4.3.277

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

PRG

61





See next page

P61 10:17Ok?N=88279.753E=99153.375

ENT

From previous page

P61 10:17Point CPno=

3 ENT



4.3.278


PRG

61

PROGRAM 61 - COGO



Key in the radius from C, and pressENT. If the radius is to small, that isif the circle does not intersect with theline AB, you will get an errormessage. In this example we key in25m.

This is the first calculated pointcoordinates. Press ENT to store thepoint or NO to cancel. In thisexample we choose only to store thesecond point.

This is the second calculated pointcoordinates. Press ENT to store thepoint or NO to cancel. In thisexample we choose to store it withENT.

See next page

5

From previous page

ENT

P61 10:17Ok?N=88313.151E=99157.173

P61 10:17Radius from CRadius=

ENT

NO

ENT

P61 10:17N=88311.700E=99140.412Store?

P61 10:17N=88288.901E=99151.092Store?

2

4.3.279

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

PRG

61



P611 0 : 1 7

P n o = _





See next page

P61 10:17

Pno=_

ENT

From previous page

P61 10:17

Area=_

P61 10:17Pcode=


ENT

ENT

ENT

4.3.280


PRG

61

PROGRAM 61 - COGO



Now you return to the Curveintersection menu. If you wish to stepto the main menu, press 4.

ENT

From previous page


P61 10:17

Point stored


4.3.281

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

PRG

61


2.2-Curveinter-section

1

5

Calculated point 1

2.2 - Curve intersectionThis program calculates the intersection between the circle atthe center of Point A and with a radius of "Radius from A",and the circle at the center of Point B and with a radius of"Radius from B".

Point A



2

2

PRG 6 1

ENT


Select 2 (Curve inters.)

Select 2 (Curve inters.)

See next page

Point B Calculated point 2

Radius from B

Radius from A

4.3.282


PRG

61

PROGRAM 61 - COGO





See next page

1

P61 10:17Ok?N=88345.862E=99136.879

ENT

From previous page

ENT


5 ENT



4.3.283

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

PRG

61




Key in the radius from A, and pressENT. In this example we key in 50m.

Key in the radius from B and pressENT. In this example we key in 20m.

See next page

P61 10:17Ok?N=88279.753E=99153.375

ENT

From previous page

P61 10:17Curve inters.Radius from ARadius=

ENT


P61 10:17Curve inters.Radius from BRadius=

05

ENT02

4.3.284


PRG

61

PROGRAM 61 - COGO


This is the first calculated pointcoordinates. Press ENT to store thepoint or NO to cancel. In thisexample we choose only to store thesecond point.

This is the second calculated pointcoordinates. Press ENT to store thepoint or NO to cancel. In thisexample we choose to store it withENT.



See next page

From previous page

ENT

NO

P61 10:17N=88296.111E=99141.868Store?

P61 10:17N=88299.599E=99155.847Store?

P61 10:17

Pno=_

P61 10:17

Area=_

ENT

ENT

4.3.285

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

PRG

61



P611 0 : 1 7

P n o = _




Now you return to the Curveintersection menu. If you wish to stepto the main menu, press 4.

From previous page

P61 10:17Pcode=


ENT

ENT

ENT



P61 10:17

Point stored

4.3.286


PRG

61

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

1

3

5

Calculatedpoint

PRG

61

Miscel-laneous

Miscellaneous

3.1 - Perpendicular offsetThis program calculates the intersection between the line A-Band the line perpendicular to line A-B going through point C.

Point A

Point BPoint C


Select 10:171 Perpend.offset2 Cent.of circle3 Stn and offset

3

1

PRG 6 1

ENT


Select 3 (Miscellaneous).

Select 1 (Perpend.offset)

See next page

4.3.287

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

PRG

61


3.1-Per-pendicularoffset





See next page

1

P61 10:17Ok?N=88345.862E=99136.879

ENT

From previous page

ENT


5 ENT


4.3.288


PRG

61

PROGRAM 61 - COGO




See next page

From previous page


P61 10:17Ok?N=88279.753E=99153.375

ENT


3 ENT


4.3.289

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

PRG

61







See next page

ENT

From previous page

P61 10:17N=88310.301E=99145.752Store?

P61 10:17

Pno=_

ENT

ENT

P61 10:17

Area=_

P61 10:17Ok?N=88313.151E=99157.173

ENT

4.3.290


PRG

61

PROGRAM 61 - COGO





Now you return to the Miscellaneousmenu. If you wish to step to the mainmenu, press 6.

P61 10:17Pcode=

From previous page

ENT



ENT

ENT

P61 10:17

Point stored


4.3.291

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

PRG

61


1

3

5

Calculatedpoint

3.2 - Center of circleThis program calculates the center of a circle going through thepoints A, B and C.

Point A

Point CPoint B



3

2

PRG 6 1

ENT



Select 2 (Cent.of circle)

See next page

3.2-Centerof circle

53

1

4.3.292


PRG

61

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

3.2-Centerof circle





See next page

1

P61 10:17Ok?N=88345.862E=99136.879

ENT

From previous page

ENT


3 ENT


4.3.293

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

PRG

61


3.2-Centerof circle



See next page

From previous page


ENT


5 ENT

P61 10:17Ok?N=88313.151E=99157.173


4.3.294


PRG

61

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

3.2-Centerof circle





See next page

ENT

From previous page

P61 10:17N=88302.364E=99103.277Store?

P61 10:17

Pno=_

ENT

ENT

P61 10:17

Area=_

P61 10:17Ok?N=88279.753E=99153.375

ENT

4.3.295

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

PRG

61


3.2-Centerof circle





P61 10:17Pcode=

From previous page

ENT



ENT

ENT

P61 10:17

Point stored


4.3.296


PRG

61

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

3.3-Stationand offset

1

5

Calculatedpoint

3.3 - Station and offsetThis program calculates a point which lies at an Right angleoffset and a Radial offset from the line A-B.

Point A

Point B



3

3

PRG 6 1

ENT



Select 3 (Stn and offset)

See next page

RT.ofsRadofs

4.3.297

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

PRG

61







See next page

1

P61 10:17Ok?N=88345.862E=99136.879

ENT

From previous page

ENT


5 ENT


4.3.298


PRG

61

PROGRAM 61 - COGO



Key in the radial offset from point Aand press ENT. A positive valuemeans that the offset is towards pointB. In this example we have chosen theoffset of +30m.

Key in the right angle offset frompoint A and press ENT. A positivevalue means that the offset is at theright from point A. In this examplewe have chosen the offset of +10m.

See next page

From previous page


P61 10:17Ok?N=88279.753E=99153.375

ENT

P61 10:17Stn and offsetRadofs=_

ENT

P61 10:17Stn and offsetRadofs=30RT.ofs=_

03

ENT01

4.3.299

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

PRG

61







See next page

ENT

From previous page

P61 10:17

Pno=_

ENT

ENT

P61 10:17

Area=_

P61 10:17Pcode=

ENT

P61 10:17N=88310.301E=99145.752Store?

4.3.300


PRG

61

PROGRAM 61 - COGO





From previous page



ENT

ENT

P61 10:17

Point stored


4.3.301

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

PRG

61


3.4-Angleand dis-tance

1

5

Calculatedpoint

3.4 - Angle and distanceThis program calculates a point which lies at an certain angleand a certain offset from the line A-B.

Point A

Point B


Select 10:174 Angle & dist.5 Config.6 Main menu

3

4

PRG 6 1

ENT


Select 3 (Miscellaneous) and pressENT.

Select 4 (Angle & dist.)

See next page

Angle

Dist. from A

ENT

4.3.302


PRG

61

PROGRAM 61 - COGO






See next page

1

P61 10:17Ok?N=88345.862E=99136.879

ENT

From previous page

ENT


5 ENT


4.3.303

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

PRG

61




Key in the angle from point A andpress ENT. A positive value means aclockwise angle. In this example wehave chosen the angle of +10 gon.

Key in the distance from point A andpress ENT. A positive value meansthat the offset is towards point B. Inthis example we have chosen theoffset of +50m.

See next page

From previous page


P61 10:17Ok?N=88279.753E=99153.375

ENT

P61 10:17Angle & dist.Angle=_

ENT

P61 10:17Angle & dist.Dist from ADist.=_

01

ENT05

4.3.304


PRG

61

PROGRAM 61 - COGO






See next page

ENT

From previous page

P61 10:17

Pno=_

ENT

ENT

P61 10:17

Area=_

P61 10:17Pcode=

ENT

P61 10:17N=88296.053E=99141.246Store?

4.3.305

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

PRG

61






From previous page



ENT

ENT

P61 10:17

Point stored


4.3.306


PRG

61

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

PRG

61

Configu-ration

Configuration

To speed up the program you can configure it so it fits yourneeds. The configuration part can be accessed from everysection of the program, under menu option 5 from the lineintersection menu, under menu option 3 from the curveintersection menu and under menu option 5 from themiscellaneous menu.Here follows an explanation of the feature.

Config. 10:171 Area change?Yes2 Store all? No3 Set out? No

Config. 10:174 Confirm? Yes5 Keep AB? No

Press the option number you wish tochange.Press NO to step from the secondscreen to the first again.

ENT

Area changeIf this is enabled, you are prompted to key in a new area file for eachpoint you enter. If this is disabled, you will only be prompted for thearea for the first point.Store allIf this is enabled, the program automatically stores all keyed in pointcoordinates.Set outIf this is enabled, the program gives you the opportunity to turn to setout mode for each point that is calculated. Set out is similar to pro-gram 23.ConfirmIf this is enabled, you are prompted to confirm the coordinates foreach point that has been fetched from the area file.Keep AB (does not work in 2, Circle intersections or 3.2 Center of an circle)If this is enabled, the program remembers the coordinates for the firstline between A and B.

4.3.307

PROGRAM 32 - ANGLE MEASUREMENT PLUS

PRG

32


Program 32 - Angle Measurement PlusWith Angle Meas Plus you can measure multiplerounds of angles, with automatic calculation of"station mean values". The measured angles willbe reduced to a final result where you can get astandard deviation for the sightings.You can also configure your own limits forhorizontal and vertical angle errors.

It is possible to choose between manual orautomatic aiming towards the targets to measure.In the latter case you’ll need a Remote Target(RMT) at every point to measure.

In automatic mode you can choose to get theslope distance also in C2.

4.3.308


PRG

32


Configuration

ENT

P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17Error limits VAError limits VAError limits VAError limits VAError limits VAPoint=0.0200Point=0.0200Point=0.0200Point=0.0200Point=0.0200Set=0.0020Set=0.0020Set=0.0020Set=0.0020Set=0.0020

ENT

P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17Error limits VAError limits VAError limits VAError limits VAError limits VAPoint=0.0200Point=0.0200Point=0.0200Point=0.0200Point=0.0200

ENT

PRG

32

Configu-ration

To speed up the program you can configure it so it fits yourneeds. The configuration part can be accessed by a long presson the PRG-key. Then choose program 32, Angle Meas Plusand press ENT. Choose option 2, Config and then 2 Options.

P32 10:17 P32 10:17 P32 10:17 P32 10:17 P32 10:17Error limits HAError limits HAError limits HAError limits HAError limits HAPoint=0.0200Point=0.0200Point=0.0200Point=0.0200Point=0.0200

P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17Error limits HAError limits HAError limits HAError limits HAError limits HAPoint=0.0200Point=0.0200Point=0.0200Point=0.0200Point=0.0200Set=0.0020Set=0.0020Set=0.0020Set=0.0020Set=0.0020

If you get a deviation larger than thisvalue the program will show an errormessage. This error limit is only tomake shure that you measure towardsthe correct target.

One set= one measurement towardsone point i both faces. If you get adifference between two sets that islarger than this value the program willshow an error message.

If you get a deviation larger than thisvalue the program will show an errormessage. This error limit is only tomake shure that you measure towardsthe correct target.

One set= one measurement towardsone point i both faces. If you get adifference between two sets that islarger than this value the program willshow an error message.

ENT

See next page

4.3.309


PRG

32


Configu-ration

This tells how much the instrumentwill point aside the point to measure,in order to force the user to do thefine adjustment when using a servodriven instrument.

Finally choose Exit and then Exitagain to quit or Run to start theprogram.

From previous page

P32 10:17 P32 10:17 P32 10:17 P32 10:17 P32 10:17Aim offsetAim offsetAim offsetAim offsetAim offsetOffset=0.0500Offset=0.0500Offset=0.0500Offset=0.0500Offset=0.0500

4.3.310


PRG

32


PRG

32

How touse

How to use

SwitchesSwitchesSwitchesSwitchesSwitches 10:1710:1710:1710:1710:171 Elevation? Yes1 Elevation? Yes1 Elevation? Yes1 Elevation? Yes1 Elevation? Yes2 Pcode?2 Pcode?2 Pcode?2 Pcode?2 Pcode? Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes3 Sightings>1 No3 Sightings>1 No3 Sightings>1 No3 Sightings>1 No3 Sightings>1 No

SwitchesSwitchesSwitchesSwitchesSwitches 10:1710:1710:1710:1710:174 Reg HD/VD?4 Reg HD/VD?4 Reg HD/VD?4 Reg HD/VD?4 Reg HD/VD? No No No No No5 Set-transit? Yes5 Set-transit? Yes5 Set-transit? Yes5 Set-transit? Yes5 Set-transit? Yes6 Aim offset? Yes6 Aim offset? Yes6 Aim offset? Yes6 Aim offset? Yes6 Aim offset? Yes

PRG 3 2

ENT


First you will step through a numberof switches that you can configure.If you wish to change a switch, pressthe corresponding number and ENT,otherwise press only ENT.

1. To get questions about IH and SH.2. Set a point code for each point.3. Enable this if you wish to do more thanone adjustment towards each point in aset.4. Store Horizontal and Vertical distancesinstead of SD. (Not possible if you wantto measure a distance in CII, Automaticmode.)5. Enable this if you want the instrumentto automatically switch to face 1 betweeneach set. If you wish to runt automaticmode this this must be enabled.6. Enable this if you want the instrumentto point beside each point so that you cando the fine adjustment yourself (onlyservo).7. Enable this if you want a new horizon-tal angle for every set according to theformula 200 gon (180°)/no of series.8. Enable this if you want to get thedifference between the highest and lowestmeasured value. In other case you will getthe standard deviation.

Enter the number of points (2-10) inthe set and press ENT.

See next page

ENT

ENT

Switches 10:17Switches 10:17Switches 10:17Switches 10:17Switches 10:177 Adjust HA? Yes7 Adjust HA? Yes7 Adjust HA? Yes7 Adjust HA? Yes7 Adjust HA? Yes8 Maxmin? Yes8 Maxmin? Yes8 Maxmin? Yes8 Maxmin? Yes8 Maxmin? Yes

P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17

No. of points=2No. of points=2No. of points=2No. of points=2No. of points=2

ENT

ENT

4.3.311


PRG

32


2

How touse

P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17

No. of series=2No. of series=2No. of series=2No. of series=2No. of series=2

P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:171 Std1 Std1 Std1 Std1 Std2 D_bar2 D_bar2 D_bar2 D_bar2 D_bar

Key in the number of repetedmeasurements you wish to performand press ENT.

Choose 1 Automatic and you'll onlyhave to aim once at the target, thenthe program will automatically switchface and perform the number ofremeasurements you set.In this case we will choose 2 Manual.

Choose which mode you wish tomeasure in, STD or D-bar.

This display will only appear if youhave a Geodimeter 640, 650 orBergstrand. Read more about this inthe Geodimeter System 600 UserManual.

2

P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:171 Normal1 Normal1 Normal1 Normal1 Normal2 High res.2 High res.2 High res.2 High res.2 High res.

1

From previous page

ENT

GDM 640, 650 and Bergstrand only

Select P32 10:17Select P32 10:17Select P32 10:17Select P32 10:17Select P32 10:171 Automatic1 Automatic1 Automatic1 Automatic1 Automatic2 Manual2 Manual2 Manual2 Manual2 Manual

Seepage4.3.321for 1Auto-matic

See page 4.3.321

1

See next page

4.3.312


PRG

32


How touse -Manual

Enter the station number and pressENT.

Enter a point code for the station andpress ENT.

Enter an instrument height and pressenter.

Key in a name for the first point andpress ENT.

See next page

1

From previous page

ENT

Stn 10:17Stn 10:17Stn 10:17Stn 10:17Stn 10:17Stn=1000Stn=1000Stn=1000Stn=1000Stn=1000Pcode=1Pcode=1Pcode=1Pcode=1Pcode=1IH=X.XXXIH=X.XXXIH=X.XXXIH=X.XXXIH=X.XXX

Point 1 10:17Point 1 10:17Point 1 10:17Point 1 10:17Point 1 10:17Point=2000Point=2000Point=2000Point=2000Point=2000

ENT

ENT

Stn 10:17Stn 10:17Stn 10:17Stn 10:17Stn 10:17Stn=1000Stn=1000Stn=1000Stn=1000Stn=1000Pcode=1Pcode=1Pcode=1Pcode=1Pcode=1

Stn 10:17Stn 10:17Stn 10:17Stn 10:17Stn 10:17Stn=1000Stn=1000Stn=1000Stn=1000Stn=1000

ENT

4.3.313


PRG

32


How touse -Manual

Point 1 10:17Point 1 10:17Point 1 10:17Point 1 10:17Point 1 10:17Point=2000Point=2000Point=2000Point=2000Point=2000Pcode=2Pcode=2Pcode=2Pcode=2Pcode=2

Point 1 10:17Point 1 10:17Point 1 10:17Point 1 10:17Point 1 10:17Point=2000Point=2000Point=2000Point=2000Point=2000Pcode=2Pcode=2Pcode=2Pcode=2Pcode=2SH=X.XXXSH=X.XXXSH=X.XXXSH=X.XXXSH=X.XXX

Do you wish to increment the pointnumber for each new point, press YESor ENT, otherwise press NO.

Here you have the opportunity tochoose a Pcode for the first point. Ifyou don’t wish to have any Pcodeleave the line blank and press ENT.

Key in the signal height for the firstpoint and press ENT.

Key in a name for the second pointand press ENT.

See next page

2


From previous page

ENT

ENT

ENT


Incr?Incr?Incr?Incr?Incr?

ENT

4.3.314


PRG

32


How touse -Manual


Here you have the opportunity tochoose a Pcode for the second point.If you don’t wish to have any Pcodeleave the line blank and press ENT.

Key in the signal height for the secondpoint and press ENT.

Choose in which Job file you wish tostore your angle measurements andpress ENT.

Here you select which memory deviceyou wish to store the Job file in bychoosing the appropriate number andpressing ENT.

See next page

3

From previous page

ENT


P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17

Job No=2Job No=2Job No=2Job No=2Job No=2

ENT

P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:171:Imem on1:Imem on1:Imem on1:Imem on1:Imem on2:Xmem off2:Xmem off2:Xmem off2:Xmem off2:Xmem off3:Serial off3:Serial off3:Serial off3:Serial off3:Serial off

ENT

ENT

4.3.315


PRG

32


How touse -Manual

P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17Aim to pointAim to pointAim to pointAim to pointAim to point20002000200020002000Press ENTPress ENTPress ENTPress ENTPress ENT

P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17HA:HA:HA:HA:HA: 368.0832368.0832368.0832368.0832368.0832HA ref: 0.0000HA ref: 0.0000HA ref: 0.0000HA ref: 0.0000HA ref: 0.0000

Make a coarse aiming towards thefirst point and press ENT.

Key in a starting (first) reference angleand press ENT.Note. This will only appear if youhave answered YES to AdjustHA inthe menu Switches.

Do the fine adjustment towards thepoint and……press A/M to measure or REG tostore without measuring.In the second case you will beprompted the following:No meas. madeREG OK?Press YES or ENT to accept or NO tocancel.

This is the first sighting towards point2000 in face 1. Press REG to store themeasurement.

See next page

DDDDD 0 10:17*0 10:17*0 10:17*0 10:17*0 10:17*HA:HA:HA:HA:HA: 0.0021 0.0021 0.0021 0.0021 0.0021VA:VA:VA:VA:VA: 102.2821102.2821102.2821102.2821102.2821

DDDDD 0 10:17*0 10:17*0 10:17*0 10:17*0 10:17*HA:HA:HA:HA:HA: 0.0021 0.0021 0.0021 0.0021 0.0021VA:VA:VA:VA:VA: 102.2821102.2821102.2821102.2821102.2821SD:SD:SD:SD:SD: 244.903244.903244.903244.903244.903

REG

From previous page

A/M

ENT

ENT

C1,Point2000

4.3.316


PRG

32


How touse -Manual

DDDDD 0 10:17*0 10:17*0 10:17*0 10:17*0 10:17*

Another sighting?Another sighting?Another sighting?Another sighting?Another sighting?

If you have enabled switch no 3 thisdisplay will appear. Press YES orENT to make another sighting or NOto cancel.

Make a coarse aiming towards thesecond point and press ENT.

Do the fine adjustment towards thepoint and……press A/M to measure or REG tostore without measuring.In the second case you will beprompted the following:No meas. madeREG OK?Press YES or ENT to accept or NO tocancel.

This is the first sighting towards point2001 in face 1. Press REG to store themeasurement.

See next page

From previous page

NO


DDDDD 0 10:17*0 10:17*0 10:17*0 10:17*0 10:17*HA:HA:HA:HA:HA: 6.8596 6.8596 6.8596 6.8596 6.8596VA:VA:VA:VA:VA: 101.1072101.1072101.1072101.1072101.1072

A/M

DDDDD 0 10:17*0 10:17*0 10:17*0 10:17*0 10:17*HA:HA:HA:HA:HA: 6.8596 6.8596 6.8596 6.8596 6.8596VA:VA:VA:VA:VA: 101.1072101.1072101.1072101.1072101.1072SD:SD:SD:SD:SD: 372.290372.290372.290372.290372.290

REG

ENT

C1,Point2001

4.3.317


PRG

32


How touse -Manual

DDDDD 0 10:17*0 10:17*0 10:17*0 10:17*0 10:17*

Another sighting?Another sighting?Another sighting?Another sighting?Another sighting?

If you have enabled switch no 3 thisdisplay will appear. Press YES orENT to make another sighting or NOto cancel.

Switch to face 2 (automatic if youhave a servo instrument).

The following display appears if youhave a mechanical instrument(disappears when you get within 1gonof the point):

Aim towards the second point 2001 inface 2 and press the A/M key on theback of the instrument.

Aim towards the first point 2000 inface 2 and press the A/M key on theback of the instrument.

If switch no 5 is enabled the instru-ment will automatically switch to faceno 1 (servo only).

Press A/M to measure or REG tostore without measuring.In the second case you will beprompted the following:No meas. madeREG OK?Press YES or ENT to accept or NO tocancel.

See next page

DDDDD 0/1 10:17*0/1 10:17*0/1 10:17*0/1 10:17*0/1 10:17*HA:HA:HA:HA:HA: 100.0021100.0021100.0021100.0021100.0021VA:VA:VA:VA:VA: 102.2815102.2815102.2815102.2815102.2815

A/M

From previous page

NO

A/M

A/M

or

or

C2,Point2001

C2,Point2000

P32 P32 P32 P32 P32 10:17 10:17 10:17 10:17 10:17

Aim to pointAim to pointAim to pointAim to pointAim to point

20012001200120012001

dHA:199 dVA:197dHA:199 dVA:197dHA:199 dVA:197dHA:199 dVA:197dHA:199 dVA:197

4.3.318


PRG

32


A/Mor

How touse -Manual

This is the second measurementtowards point 2000 in face 1. PressREG to store the measurement.

Press A/M to measure or REG tostore without measuring.In the second case you will beprompted the following:No meas. madeREG OK?Press YES or ENT to accept or NO tocancel.

This is the second measurementtowards point 2001 in face 1. PressREG to store the measurement.

Switch to face 2 (automatic if youhave a servo instrument).

The following display appears if youhave a mechanical instrument(disappears when you get within 1gonof the point):

Aim towards the second point 2001 inface 2 and press the A/M key on theback of the instrument.

From previous page

REG

DDDDD 0/1 10:17*0/1 10:17*0/1 10:17*0/1 10:17*0/1 10:17*HA:HA:HA:HA:HA: 106.8589106.8589106.8589106.8589106.8589VA:VA:VA:VA:VA: 101.1072101.1072101.1072101.1072101.1072

REG

DDDDD 0/1 10:17*0/1 10:17*0/1 10:17*0/1 10:17*0/1 10:17*HA:HA:HA:HA:HA: 106.8589106.8589106.8589106.8589106.8589VA:VA:VA:VA:VA: 101.1072101.1072101.1072101.1072101.1072SD:SD:SD:SD:SD: 372.290372.290372.290372.290372.290

A/M

DDDDD 0/1 10:17*0/1 10:17*0/1 10:17*0/1 10:17*0/1 10:17*HA:HA:HA:HA:HA: 100.0021100.0021100.0021100.0021100.0021VA:VA:VA:VA:VA: 102.2815102.2815102.2815102.2815102.2815SD:SD:SD:SD:SD: 244.903244.903244.903244.903244.903

C1,Point2000

C1,Point2001

C2,Point2001

P32 10:17 P32 10:17 P32 10:17 P32 10:17 P32 10:17

Aim to pointAim to pointAim to pointAim to pointAim to point

20012001200120012001

dHA:199 dVA:197dHA:199 dVA:197dHA:199 dVA:197dHA:199 dVA:197dHA:199 dVA:197

See next page

4.3.319


PRG

32


How touse -Manual

Point 1 10:17Point 1 10:17Point 1 10:17Point 1 10:17Point 1 10:17Diff HA:0.0011Diff HA:0.0011Diff HA:0.0011Diff HA:0.0011Diff HA:0.0011Diff VA:0.0004Diff VA:0.0004Diff VA:0.0004Diff VA:0.0004Diff VA:0.0004Diff SD:0.000Diff SD:0.000Diff SD:0.000Diff SD:0.000Diff SD:0.000

Point 2 10:17Point 2 10:17Point 2 10:17Point 2 10:17Point 2 10:17Diff HA:0.0010Diff HA:0.0010Diff HA:0.0010Diff HA:0.0010Diff HA:0.0010Diff VA:0.0004Diff VA:0.0004Diff VA:0.0004Diff VA:0.0004Diff VA:0.0004Diff SD:0.000Diff SD:0.000Diff SD:0.000Diff SD:0.000Diff SD:0.000

Aim towards the first point 2000 inface 2 and press the A/M key on theback of the instrument.

If switch no 5 is enabled the instru-ment will automatically switch to faceno 1 (servo only).

Here are the differences for the firstpoint (if you have 3 or more pointsthis will be presented as standarddeviations). If you wish to view all thedeviations press YES or ENT,otherwise press NO. When runningthe program you will get an errormessage as soon as the programdiscovers a difference larger than thelimits you have set.

Here are the differences for the secondpoint. Press ENT to continue.

Do you wish to sort the measureddata pointwise in the chosen Job-file,press YES or ENT, otherwise pressNO.

See next page

P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17

Sort JOB file?Sort JOB file?Sort JOB file?Sort JOB file?Sort JOB file?

From previous page

ENT

ENT

ENT

A/Mor

C2,Point2000

A finalreduc-tion willautoma-ticallybestoredin theJob file.

4.3.320


PRG

32


How touse -Manual

P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17


ENT


Choose a Job file to store the sorteddata in.


From previous page

ENT

P0

4.3.321


PRG

32


How touse -Autom.

P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17

Dist. C2?Dist. C2?Dist. C2?Dist. C2?Dist. C2?

Enter the number of remeasurementsthat will be carried out if themeasured values lies outside the limitsspecified in the configuration part ofthe program (see page 4.3.308) or ifthe target is temporarily hidden.

Do you wish to get the distancemeasured in C2? If so press YES orENT.

From page 4.3.311

ENT

P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17

No. of remeas.=2No. of remeas.=2No. of remeas.=2No. of remeas.=2No. of remeas.=2

ENT

Note - In this mode you’ll need at leastone Remote Target.

4.3.322


PRG

32


How touse -Autom.

Enter the station number and pressENT.

Enter a point code for the station andpress ENT.

Enter an instrument height and pressenter.

Key in a name for the first point andpress ENT.

See next page

1

From previous page

ENT

Stn 10:17Stn 10:17Stn 10:17Stn 10:17Stn 10:17Stn=1000Stn=1000Stn=1000Stn=1000Stn=1000Pcode=1Pcode=1Pcode=1Pcode=1Pcode=1IH=X.XXXIH=X.XXXIH=X.XXXIH=X.XXXIH=X.XXX


ENT

ENT

Stn 10:17Stn 10:17Stn 10:17Stn 10:17Stn 10:17Stn=1000Stn=1000Stn=1000Stn=1000Stn=1000Pcode=1Pcode=1Pcode=1Pcode=1Pcode=1

Stn 10:17Stn 10:17Stn 10:17Stn 10:17Stn 10:17Stn=1000Stn=1000Stn=1000Stn=1000Stn=1000

ENT

4.3.323


PRG

32


How touse -Autom.



Do you wish to increment the pointnumber for each new point, press YESor ENT, otherwise press NO.

Here you have the opportunity tochoose a Pcode for the first point. Ifyou don’t wish to have any Pcodeleave the line blank and press ENT.

Key in the signal height for the firstpoint and press ENT.

Key in a name for the second pointand press ENT.

See next page

2


From previous page

ENT

ENT

ENT


Incr?Incr?Incr?Incr?Incr?

ENT

4.3.324


PRG

32


How touse -Autom.


Here you have the opportunity tochoose a Pcode for the second point.If you don’t wish to have any Pcodeleave the line blank and press ENT.

Key in the signal height for the secondpoint and press ENT.

Choose in which Job file you wish tostore your angle measurements andpress ENT.


See next page

3

From previous page

ENT


P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17


ENT


ENT

ENT

4.3.325


PRG

32


How touse -Autom.


P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17HA:HA:HA:HA:HA: 368.0832368.0832368.0832368.0832368.0832HA ref: 0.0000HA ref: 0.0000HA ref: 0.0000HA ref: 0.0000HA ref: 0.0000

Make a coarse aiming towards thefirst point and press ENT.

Key in a starting (first) reference angleand press ENT.Note. This will only appear if youhave answered YES to AdjustHA inthe menu Switches.

The instrument is searching for thetarget.

When target is found the instrumentstarts the measurement.

See next page

P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17SearchingSearchingSearchingSearchingSearchingPlease waitPlease waitPlease waitPlease waitPlease wait

P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17

MeasuringMeasuringMeasuringMeasuringMeasuring

From previous page

ENT

ENT

4.3.326


PRG

32


How touse -Autom.

See next page

From previous page


P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17SearchingSearchingSearchingSearchingSearchingPlease waitPlease waitPlease waitPlease waitPlease wait

P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17

MeasuringMeasuringMeasuringMeasuringMeasuring

ENT

Make a coarse aiming towards thesecond point and press ENT.

The instrument is searching for thetarget.

When target is found the instrumentstarts the measurement.

4.3.327


PRG

32


How touse -Autom.

From previous page

NO

ENT

ENT

See next page

Here are the resulting differences forthe first point. When running theprogram you will get an error messageas soon as the program discovers adifference larger than the limits youhave set.

Here are the resulting differences forthe second point. Press ENT tocontinue.

Press YES or ENT to remeasure andthe program will automaticallyremeasure all targets.

Point 2 10:17Point 2 10:17Point 2 10:17Point 2 10:17Point 2 10:17MaxMinHA:0.0011MaxMinHA:0.0011MaxMinHA:0.0011MaxMinHA:0.0011MaxMinHA:0.0011MaxMinVA:0.0004MaxMinVA:0.0004MaxMinVA:0.0004MaxMinVA:0.0004MaxMinVA:0.0004MaxMinSD:0.000MaxMinSD:0.000MaxMinSD:0.000MaxMinSD:0.000MaxMinSD:0.000

Point 1 10:17Point 1 10:17Point 1 10:17Point 1 10:17Point 1 10:17MaxMinHA:0.0006MaxMinHA:0.0006MaxMinHA:0.0006MaxMinHA:0.0006MaxMinHA:0.0006MaxMinVA:0.0018MaxMinVA:0.0018MaxMinVA:0.0018MaxMinVA:0.0018MaxMinVA:0.0018MaxMinSD:0.000MaxMinSD:0.000MaxMinSD:0.000MaxMinSD:0.000MaxMinSD:0.000

P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17

Remeasure?Remeasure?Remeasure?Remeasure?Remeasure?

4.3.328


PRG

32


How touse -Autom.

P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17


ENT


Do you wish to sort the measureddata pointwise in the chosen Job-file,press YES or ENT, otherwise pressNO.

Choose a Job file to store the sorteddata in.


From previous page

ENT

P0

P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17P32 10:17

Sort JOB file?Sort JOB file?Sort JOB file?Sort JOB file?Sort JOB file?

4.3.329


PRG

32


Registereddata

50=322=10004=13=1.5735=20004=26=1.4537=0.00218=102.28199=244.90335=20014=26=1.5267=6.85968=101.10709=372.29015=200117=206.861418=298.89369=180.99995=200017=200.003718=297.71909=120.12565=20007=100.00168=102.28139=244.90335=20017=106.85888=101.10719=372.29005=200117=306.860318=298.89269=111.00095=200017=300.003718=297.71839=145.99970=RESULT5=20004=26=1.4537=0.00288=102.28149=244.90330=S_devHA:0.00110=S_devVA:0.00040=S_devSD:0.00005=20014=2»»»»»»»»»

6=1.5267=6.86008=101.10699=372.29000=S_devHA:0.00100=S_devVA:0.00040=S_devSD:0.00000=REDUCED5=20004=26=1.4537=0.00008=102.28145=20014=26=1.5267=6.85728=101.10699=372.29000=SORTED5=20004=26=1.4537=0.00218=102.28199=244.903317=200.003718=297.71909=201.87697=100.00168=102.28139=244.903317=300.003718=297.71839=201.88765=20014=26=1.5267=6.85968=101.10709=372.290117=206.861418=298.89369=300.46557=106.85888=101.10719=372.290017=306.860318=298.89269=344.8777

Job NoStn NoPcodeIHPnoPcodeSHHAVASDPnoPcodeSHHAVASDPnoHAIIVAIISD*PnoHAIIVAIISD*PnoHAVASDPnoHAVASDPnoHAIIVAIISD*PnoHAIIVAIISD*InfoPnoPcodeSHHAVASDInfoInfoInfoPnoPcode»»»»»»»»»

SHHAVASDInfoInfoInfoInfoPnoPcodeSHHAVAPnoPcodeSHHAVASDInfoPnoPcodeSHHAVASDHAIIVAIISD*HAVASDHAIIVAIISD*PnoPcodeSHHAVASDHAIIVAIISD*HAVASDHAIIVAIISD*

Text Label Text Label

* only in Automatic mode ifDistance C2 is chosen.

4.3.331

PRG

60

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3 PROGRAM 60 - ATHLETICS

In general

Program 60, Athletics, is a program designed for athleticscompetitions. It can be used for measuring distances invarious events such as javelin, discus and hammer.

Before you start the program you must enter the followinglabel texts using program 41, Enter Labels:

Label Text Description90 ROUND enter the current round, e.g. javelin191 NO the number of the entrant92 LENGTH the measured distance of the throw,

only in meters93 OFFSET radial offset for current event, only in

meters

PRG

60

In general

offset length

Geodimeter

landing-point

Fig. 1 Distance definitions.

centre

4.3.332

PRG

60


How to use

PRG

60

How touse STD P60 10:16STD P60 10:16STD P60 10:16STD P60 10:16STD P60 10:16

HA:HA:HA:HA:HA:VA:VA:VA:VA:VA:

Locate the instrument on a suitablepoint and start program 60. Enter inwhich Jobfile and in which unit youwish to save the measured data.

Aim towards the centre, see fig. onthe previous page, and press A/M tomeasure the point.

Press REG to registrate themeasurement.

Enter the radial offset and press ENT.Javelin=8.00 mHammer=1.068 mDiscus=1.25 m

Enter the round of the event and pressENT, e.g. Hammer round 2 can beexpressed as Hammer2.

P0

STD P60 10:16STD P60 10:16STD P60 10:16STD P60 10:16STD P60 10:16HA:HA:HA:HA:HA:VA:VA:VA:VA:VA:SD:SD:SD:SD:SD:

60 ENTPRG

A/M

REG

STD P60 10:16STD P60 10:16STD P60 10:16STD P60 10:16STD P60 10:16

Offset=Offset=Offset=Offset=Offset=

See next page


Round=Round=Round=Round=Round=

ENT

ENT

4.3.333

PRG

60


Enter the number of the entrant andpress ENT.

Measuring mode

You are now in theodolite mode andcan start measuring by pressing theA/M key.

Press REG to registrate themeasurement.

The program has now calculated thelength. Round off the length to alower cm, e.g. 95.158=95.15. PressYES or ENT to store the result orNO to continue without storing.

Do you wish to continue with a newmeasurement, press ENT. Otherwisepress PRG and 0 to exit the program.

Athletics

STD P60 10:16STD P60 10:16STD P60 10:16STD P60 10:16STD P60 10:16EntrantEntrantEntrantEntrantEntrantNo=No=No=No=No=

STD P60 10:16STD P60 10:16STD P60 10:16STD P60 10:16STD P60 10:16HA:HA:HA:HA:HA:VA:VA:VA:VA:VA:

STD P60 10:16STD P60 10:16STD P60 10:16STD P60 10:16STD P60 10:16HA:HA:HA:HA:HA:VA:VA:VA:VA:VA:SD:SD:SD:SD:SD:

STD P60 10:16STD P60 10:16STD P60 10:16STD P60 10:16STD P60 10:16No=No=No=No=No=Length=Length=Length=Length=Length=Store ?Store ?Store ?Store ?Store ?

ENT

REG

A/M


Round=Round=Round=Round=Round=

YES

PRG 0

4.3.335

PRG

30

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3 PROGRAM 30 - MEASURE COORDINATES

1101

Est.Stn.

Pno 3

Pno 4

Pno 2Pno 1

4.3.336

PRG

30


In general

With Program 30, Measure Coordinates, you can measureand store your coordinates directly to an Area file, i.e youdon't have to store the coordinates in a Job file and thentransfer them to an Area file. The coordinates can then beused for new station establishments.

Program 30 is included in the following programs:

PRG

30

In general



Program 24RefLine

Program 40U.D.S

Program 30 Measure Coordinates

Program 23SetOut

4.3.337

PRG

30


How to use

PRG

30

How touse P30 10:16 P30 10:16 P30 10:16 P30 10:16 P30 10:16

Stn=1_Stn=1_Stn=1_Stn=1_Stn=1_

Assuming that Station Establishmenthas been carried out at your stationpoint press PRG 30 and ENT to startprogram 30.

The text "Measure Coord" willbriefly show on the display and thenyour Stn number is shown. PressENT.Note! If the station hasn't beenestablished you're taken to Program20, Station Establishment.

Enter the name of the Area file inwhich you want to store yourcoordinates.

Choose what memory unit you'll use.Toggle between on and off by pres-sing the corresponding numeric key.Confirm with ENT.

Enter the number of the point to bemeasured.Confirm with ENT.

P0

P30 10:16 P30 10:16 P30 10:16 P30 10:16 P30 10:16

Area=1_Area=1_Area=1_Area=1_Area=1_

30 ENTPRG

ENT

ENT

P30 10:16 P30 10:16 P30 10:16 P30 10:16 P30 10:161:Imem on1:Imem on1:Imem on1:Imem on1:Imem on2:Xmem off2:Xmem off2:Xmem off2:Xmem off2:Xmem off3:Serial off3:Serial off3:Serial off3:Serial off3:Serial off

See next page

P30 10:16 P30 10:16 P30 10:16 P30 10:16 P30 10:16Pno=_Pno=_Pno=_Pno=_Pno=_

ENT

ENT

Note ! ☛

4.3.338

PRG

30


Enter a Pcode and press ENT.

Enter the signal height for the pointto be measured and press ENT.

Aim towards the point to bemeasured and press A/M.

Note. It is possible to choose anymeasurement mode: STD, TRK or D-bar, one or two-face.

The coordinates for your measuredpoint are shown in the display. PressREG to store them in the selectedArea file.

Do you want to measure and registermore points? In this example we willmeasure one more point. Press ENT.

MeasureCoordinates

P30 10:16 P30 10:16 P30 10:16 P30 10:16 P30 10:16Pno=5Pno=5Pno=5Pno=5Pno=5Pcode=_Pcode=_Pcode=_Pcode=_Pcode=_

P30 10:16 P30 10:16 P30 10:16 P30 10:16 P30 10:16Pno=5Pno=5Pno=5Pno=5Pno=5Pcode=5Pcode=5Pcode=5Pcode=5Pcode=5SH=0.000_SH=0.000_SH=0.000_SH=0.000_SH=0.000_

STD P30 10:16*STD P30 10:16*STD P30 10:16*STD P30 10:16*STD P30 10:16*HA: 123.4567HA: 123.4567HA: 123.4567HA: 123.4567HA: 123.4567VA: 98.7654VA: 98.7654VA: 98.7654VA: 98.7654VA: 98.7654

STD P30 10:16*STD P30 10:16*STD P30 10:16*STD P30 10:16*STD P30 10:16*N :1887910.683N :1887910.683N :1887910.683N :1887910.683N :1887910.683E :3950613.782E :3950613.782E :3950613.782E :3950613.782E :3950613.782ELE: 111.125ELE: 111.125ELE: 111.125ELE: 111.125ELE: 111.125

ENT

A/M

ENT


more?more?more?more?more?

REG

ENTSee next page

Note ! ☛Onlyshown ifheightsare used.

Note ! ☛


4.3.339

PRG

30


Enter the number of the point to bemeasured. (Pno is automaticallyincremented by 1 for each new point.You can, however, choose whatevernumber you want).Confirm with ENT.

Enter a Pcode for the new point andpress ENT. (The previously usedPcode is shown default. You have tochange this manually). We choose 6in this example. Press 6 and ENT.

Enter the signal height for the pointto be measured and press ENT. (Thepreviously used SH is shown default).

Aim towards the new point to bemeasured and press A/M.

Note. It is possible to choose anymeasurement mode: STD, TRK or D-bar, one or two-face.

The coordinates for your secont pointare shown in the display. Press REGto store them in the selected Area file.

MeasureCoordinates

STD P30 10:16STD P30 10:16STD P30 10:16STD P30 10:16STD P30 10:16Pno=6Pno=6Pno=6Pno=6Pno=6

STD P30 10:16STD P30 10:16STD P30 10:16STD P30 10:16STD P30 10:16Pno=6Pno=6Pno=6Pno=6Pno=6Pcode=5Pcode=5Pcode=5Pcode=5Pcode=5

ENT

ENT

ENT

A/M

REGSee next page


P30 10:16 P30 10:16 P30 10:16 P30 10:16 P30 10:16Pno=6Pno=6Pno=6Pno=6Pno=6Pcode=6Pcode=6Pcode=6Pcode=6Pcode=6SH=1.800_SH=1.800_SH=1.800_SH=1.800_SH=1.800_

STD P30 10:16*STD P30 10:16*STD P30 10:16*STD P30 10:16*STD P30 10:16*HA: 234.5678HA: 234.5678HA: 234.5678HA: 234.5678HA: 234.5678VA: 88.7654VA: 88.7654VA: 88.7654VA: 88.7654VA: 88.7654

STD P30 10:16*STD P30 10:16*STD P30 10:16*STD P30 10:16*STD P30 10:16*N :1887832.876N :1887832.876N :1887832.876N :1887832.876N :1887832.876E :3950413.456E :3950413.456E :3950413.456E :3950413.456E :3950413.456ELE:ELE:ELE:ELE:ELE: 89.125 89.125 89.125 89.125 89.125


Note ! ☛

4.3.340

PRG

30


Do you want to measure and registermore points? In this example we aresatisfied with two points. Press NO.

You are now taken to P0.

MeasureCoordinates


more?more?more?more?more?

P0 10:16 P0 10:16 P0 10:16 P0 10:16 P0 10:16

Temp=20.0Temp=20.0Temp=20.0Temp=20.0Temp=20.0

NO

Area File Label No.

Stn 2Stn Coordinates 37,38,(39)RefObj 62RefObj Coords 37,38,(39)HA_ref* 21HD 11IH 3Info, measured point 0Pno 5Pcode 4SH 6Raw data 7,8,9Measured Coords 37,38,(39)Next Pno 5. 4. 6. 7,8,9. 37,38,(39). .

Here are the data that can be stored in the Area file you have choosen.

* HA_ref for Known Station = calculated and Set HA, HA_ref for Free Station and Known Station+ = Current instrument direction when exiting P20.

4.3.341

PROGRAM 33 - ROBOTIC LITE

PRG

33


Program 33 - Robotic LiteRobotic Lite is a program for collecting largeamounts of data for volume calculations, terrainmodels or hydrographic applications.With Robotic Lite you can collect data as a singleuser. The only requirements are that you have aservo instrument with a tracker and a remotetarget (RMT). The instrument will follow theRMT and store data with preset intervals. Thesecan either be in form of the time betweenmeasurements or the time you have held theRMT still.You need to prepare a UDS before you startProgram 33 and the UDS must collect Pointnumber, Pcode, Signal height etc. with automaticincr. and automatic dup.

4.3.342


PRG

33


The program is divided in two parts:

1. Time & DistEnter a time, e.g. 10 seconds and a distance, e.g. 2 metersand the instruments will register data every 10th second,under the condition that you have moved not less than 2meters from the last point of registration.

2. Stop & GoEnter a time, e.g. 2 seconds and a distance, e.g. 2 metersand the instrument will register data when you have movedmore than two meters under the condition that you haveheld your target still for not less than 2 seconds.

A useful function in Stop&Go is that the tracklight isautomatically switched on when the program is initiatedand starts flashing. When a registration is made the flashstops for 2 seconds and you get a confirmation that theregistration is done when the flash starts again.

Automatic searchIf the instrument looses contact with the remote target, itwill automatically start searching for the target until itregains contact and locks on to it.

Default settingsWhen the program is started it will automatically set theinstrument in the following modes:• tracking• auto centering• auto search

4.3.343


PRG

33


PRG

33

How touse

How to use

Stn estab.Stn estab.Stn estab.Stn estab.Stn estab. 10:1710:1710:1710:1710:171 Ok1 Ok1 Ok1 Ok1 Ok2 Known Station2 Known Station2 Known Station2 Known Station2 Known Station3 Free Station3 Free Station3 Free Station3 Free Station3 Free Station

Stn estab.Stn estab.Stn estab.Stn estab.Stn estab. 10:1710:1710:1710:1710:174 Known Station+4 Known Station+4 Known Station+4 Known Station+4 Known Station+

PRG 3 3

ENT


Here you can perform stationestablishment if you wish. In this casewe choose not to and press 1 Ok.

Choose between 1 Time & Dist and 2Stop & Go. In this case we willchoose 1 Time & Dist.

Enter the time interval that must havepassed since the last registration inorder to get a new registration.

See next page

ENT

SelectSelectSelectSelectSelect 10:1710:1710:1710:1710:171 Time & Dist1 Time & Dist1 Time & Dist1 Time & Dist1 Time & Dist2 Stop & Go2 Stop & Go2 Stop & Go2 Stop & Go2 Stop & Go

Time&DistTime&DistTime&DistTime&DistTime&Dist 10:1710:1710:1710:1710:17Time = 10Time = 10Time = 10Time = 10Time = 10

ENT

1

1

4.3.344


PRG

33


ENT

How touse

Time&Dist 10:17Time&Dist 10:17Time&Dist 10:17Time&Dist 10:17Time&Dist 10:17

Aim to AAim to AAim to AAim to AAim to APress ENTPress ENTPress ENTPress ENTPress ENT

Enter the distance that you must havemoved since the last registration inorder to get a new registration.

Enter the UDS you wish to use foryour measurement.

Now you are ready to set a searchsector.

Aim the instrument towards the firstsector limit and press ENT.

Aim the instrument towards thesecond sector limit and press ENT.

The sector will automatically becentered if you loose contact with theRMT.

Time&Dist 10:17Time&Dist 10:17Time&Dist 10:17Time&Dist 10:17Time&Dist 10:17

Aim to BAim to BAim to BAim to BAim to BPress ENTPress ENTPress ENTPress ENTPress ENT

From previous page

ENT

See next page

Time&Dist 10:17Time&Dist 10:17Time&Dist 10:17Time&Dist 10:17Time&Dist 10:17Time = 10Time = 10Time = 10Time = 10Time = 10Dist.= 5Dist.= 5Dist.= 5Dist.= 5Dist.= 5

Time&Dist 10:17Time&Dist 10:17Time&Dist 10:17Time&Dist 10:17Time&Dist 10:17Time = 10Time = 10Time = 10Time = 10Time = 10Dist.= 5Dist.= 5Dist.= 5Dist.= 5Dist.= 5UDS=UDS=UDS=UDS=UDS=

ENT

ENT

4.3.345


PRG

33


How touse

Key in the Job file in which you wishto store the registrations.

Select in which memory unit you wishto store the data and press ENT. Inthis case we select 1 Imem.

This is the first step in the exampleUDS. Enter the first Point numberand press ENT.Set Pno in Auto Incr./Decr.

Enter a Pcode for the first point andpress ENT.Set Pcode in Auto Dup.

See next page

1

From previous page

ENT

UDS P3 10:17UDS P3 10:17UDS P3 10:17UDS P3 10:17UDS P3 10:17STEP1STEP1STEP1STEP1STEP1 SetSetSetSetSetPno=1Pno=1Pno=1Pno=1Pno=1

UDS P3 10:17UDS P3 10:17UDS P3 10:17UDS P3 10:17UDS P3 10:17STEP2STEP2STEP2STEP2STEP2 SetSetSetSetSetPcode=1Pcode=1Pcode=1Pcode=1Pcode=1

ENT

ENT

UDS P3 10:17UDS P3 10:17UDS P3 10:17UDS P3 10:17UDS P3 10:171 Imem ON1 Imem ON1 Imem ON1 Imem ON1 Imem ON2 Xmem OFF2 Xmem OFF2 Xmem OFF2 Xmem OFF2 Xmem OFF3 Serial OFF3 Serial OFF3 Serial OFF3 Serial OFF3 Serial OFF

UDS P3 10:17UDS P3 10:17UDS P3 10:17UDS P3 10:17UDS P3 10:17

Job no=_Job no=_Job no=_Job no=_Job no=_

ENT

Note !This is only an example UDS.

4.3.346


PRG

33


How touse

TRK P3TRK P3TRK P3TRK P3TRK P3 10:17 10:17 10:17 10:17 10:17

Target not foundTarget not foundTarget not foundTarget not foundTarget not found

TRK P3 10:17 Am+TRK P3 10:17 Am+TRK P3 10:17 Am+TRK P3 10:17 Am+TRK P3 10:17 Am+Pcode:1Pcode:1Pcode:1Pcode:1Pcode:1Pno:4Pno:4Pno:4Pno:4Pno:4SH=1.000SH=1.000SH=1.000SH=1.000SH=1.000

Enter the signal height for the firstpoint and press ENT.Set SH in Auto Dup.

Aim to a point where you want tostart the measurement. Walk to thepoint and the instrument willautomatically lock on to the RMTand starts to follow.

As soon as the target is found and thefirst registration is performed you cansee the information in the display.

You are now ready to move on to thenext point to measure.

To end the program press PRG and 0.Otherwise continue and collect morepoints.

P0

From previous page

PRG

UDS P3 10:17UDS P3 10:17UDS P3 10:17UDS P3 10:17UDS P3 10:17STEP3STEP3STEP3STEP3STEP3 SetSetSetSetSetSH=1.000SH=1.000SH=1.000SH=1.000SH=1.000

ENT

0

Appendix A – Label List

0123456789

101112131415161718192021222324252627282930313335373839404142434445

InfoDataStnI H

PcodePnoSHHAVASDDHTHD

SqrAreVolumeGradeAreadH

HAIIVAIIdV

OffsetHArefCompUnitsHAIVAISVASHASHDSHTPPM

BM ELEPrismC

SNE

ELEdNdE

dELEUTMSCSlopedHA

InformationData used in INFO/DATA combinationStation NoInstrument HeightPoint CodePoint NumberSignal HeightHorizontal AngleVertical AngleSlope distanceVertical Distance (IH and SH not included)Horizontal distanceArea of an surface (Result from Program 25)Volume (Result from Program 25)Percent of grade ((DHT/HD) 100)Area fileDifference between C1 and C2 horizontal angles**Horizontal angle which was measured in C2 and stored**Vertical Angle which was measured in C2 and stored**Difference between C2 and C1 vertical angles**Offset constant. Can be added to or subtracted from the SDHorizontal Reference AngleCompensator ON=1, OFF=0Status of unit set, e.g. Status=3214 (Mills Meter Fahr InchHg)Horizontal angle which was measured in C1Vertical angle which was measured in C1Setting out vertical angleSetting out horisontal angleSetting out horizontal distanceSetting out heightAtmospheric Correction, parts per million (PPM)Benchmark elevationPrism constantInfo about Sections (Length tables) in P39 RoadLineNorthing coordinates.*Easting coordinates.*Elevation coordinates.*(39=49+STN HT)Relative to stored X (N) coord of set out point (P23)Relative to stored Y (E) coord of set out point (P23)Relative to stored Z (ELE) coord of set out point (P23)Universal Transverse Mercator Scale Factor.Slope inclinationCorrection value of the calculated bearing (P20)

DescriptionTextNo.

F

*Cleared when power OFF **Only Geodimeter Instrument

*

Appendix A – Label List

4647484950515253545556575859606162636465666768697071727374757677787980818283848586878889

90-99

S_devNrErVD

JOB NoDat.Time

OperatProj

Inst.NoTempBlank

EA RadRefracShotIDActiv

Ref ObjDiam

Radiush%t'

SONSOESHT

RadoffsRt.offsRadoffsRt.offsPressdHTdHDdHAComENDSec

A-paramSecIncCl.ofs.PCoeff.

PHtLayer

LayerHProfilDist.

–

Standard deviationRel. North Coord.Rel. East Coord.Vertical distance (IH and SH included) (49 = 10+3-6)Job No file for storage of raw and calculated data.DateTimeOperator identificationProject identificationInstrument NumberTemperatureEmpty row in UDS's where it is convenient to have a blank line.Earth RadiusRefractionShot IdentityActivity CodeReference ObjectDiameterRadiusRelative humidity in %Wet temperatureNorthing Coordinate of setting out pointEasting Coordinate of setting out pointElevation of setting out pointKeyed in radial offset dimensionKeyed in right angle offset dimensionCalculated radial offset dimension in setting out program.Calculated right angle offset dimension in setting out programAir PressureDiff. between ELE and SHT (75=29-39)Diff. between setting out distance and measured distanceDiff. between setting out bearing and the present instr. pointingCommunication protocol parameter settings.Signifies the end of the User Definable SequenceSection or Length table in P39 RoadLineA-parameterSection IntervalCenter line offsetParabola coefficientPoint Height differenceLayer numberLayer heightProfile numberDistance from Def.point to Ref.pointLabels which can be defined by the user

F

No. Text Description

Info Codes

The following pages will describe the different info codes that canappear in Your Geodimeter. If an error appears frequently the instru-ment should be left to authorized service.In some cases the info code also includes a device code, e.g 22.3. Themost frequent codes are:1=Serial, 2=Imem, 3=Xmem, 6=Radio, 7=Distance meterIf a device code appears, check the info code description. If the code isnot described the error is internal and the instrument should be left toauthorized service.

Info 1 – Compensator out of range

Cause:

Action:

Info 2 – Wrong face

Cause:

Action:

Info 3 – Distance already recorded

Cause:

Action:

Info 4 – Invalid measurement

Cause:

Action:

The instrument is tilted too much. The dual-axis compensator cannot compensate for the inclination.

Level the instrument or disconnect the dual-axis compensator.

The operation was carried out while the instrument was in anillegal mode. E.g: Trying to measure in the wrong face.

Change to face 1, showing angles in the display and retry.

The distance to the current object has already been registered.

If a new registration is required a new measurement must becarried out.

• The measurement is invalid, e.g. several measurements towardsthe same point or the measured points lies 200 gon from eachother, P20, Free Station.

• Trying to perform a calculation which is dependent from adistance without having measured any distance, P20 Free Stationand Z/IZ.

• Check that the circumstances above does not occur and redo themeasurement.

Info 1 - 4

Info Codes

Info 5 – Undefined mode or table

Cause:

Action:

Info 6 – Vertical angle less than 15gon from horizontal angle

Cause:

Action:

Info 7 – Distance not yet measured

Cause:

Action:

Info 8 – Bat Low

Cause:

Action:

Info 9 – Bat Low in the external unit (Geodat 500)

Cause:

Action:

Info 10 – No active device

Cause:

Action:

Tries to use a display- or output-table that does not exist.

Choose another table or create a new.

The vertical angle is less than 15gon from the horizontal anglewhen performing a Tilt Axis Calibration.

Redo the calibration with an increased horizontal angle.

Tries to register without having performed a distancemeasurement. E.g: when using an U.D.S. which includes labels thatare dependent from a distance.

Perform a distance measurement before registration.

The connected battery is drained.

Replace the battery with a new and connect the drained battery toa charger.

The battery connected to the external unit is drained.

Replace the battery with a new and connect the drained battery toa charger.

Tries to register in an U.D.S. without having defined a storage unit.

Check that the U.D.S. includes a logon procedure. Restart theU.D.S. and choose a storage unit (IMEM, XMEM or Serial).

Info 5 - 10

Info Codes

You have entered a incorrect section in Program 39.

Check that the given section contains a horizontal and a verticalalignment.

Trying to run Program 22 or Program 28 in remote mode.

Switch to manual mode and start the program again.

Trying to run Program 22 or Program 28 with Autolock on.

Switch to manual mode and start the program again.

Trying to make a collimation measurement in remote mode.Collimation measurements can only be made from the instrument

Start the collimation measurement from the instrument.

• The cables are not connected correctly or are damaged.• The battery is drained.• The data for transfer contains errors.

• Check that the cables are connected properly.• Check that the batteries are not drained.• Run the transfer again and check if any error appears.

If so check the file for any errors and correct them.

You have entered a wrong labelnumber. The label does not exist, isnot correct or does not contain any data.

Info 15 – Not correct section

Cause:

Action:

Info 16 – Remote Active

Cause:

Action:

Info 17 – Autolock Active

Cause:

Action:

Info 18 – CU not on alidad

Cause:

Action:

Info 19 – Communication error

Cause:

Action:

Info 20 – Label error

Cause:

Info 15 - 20

Info Codes

Info 21 21.1 – Overrun error21.2 – Parity error21.4 – Framing error21.8 – Received brake

Cause:

Action:

Info 22 – No or wrong device connected

Cause:

Info 23 – Time out

Cause:

Action:

Info 24 – Illegal communication mode

Cause:

Action:

Info 25 – Real time clock error

Action:

Info 26 – Change backup battery

Action:

• Wrong communication parameters (label 78).• The cables are not connected correctly or are damaged.• The battery is drained.

• Check that the same parameters are set in the target unit as in thesource unit.

• Check that the cables are connected properly.• Check that batteries are not drained.

Tries to access a device that is not connected or working.

An error occured during a communication session.

• Check that the batteries are not drained.• Check that the cables are connected properly.

The operation was carried out while the instrument was in anillegal mode.

Set the instrument in face 1, press STD, TRK or D_bar and retry.

Try to set date and time. If that does not help the instrumentshould be left to authorized service.

The instrument can be used but should be left to authorized servicefor replacement of the battery. There is a risk for total loss ofmemory.

Info 21-26

Combinations are possible, e.g. 21.12means info 21.4 and info 21.8

Info Codes

Info 27 – Option not installed

Cause:

Action:

Info 29 – The current table can not be changed

Cause:

Action:

Info 30 – Syntax error

Cause:

Action:

Info 31 – Out of range

Cause:

Info 32 – Not found

Cause:

Info 33 – File record exist

Cause:

Info 34 – Illegal record separator

Cause:

• Tries to select a program which is not installed in the instrument.• Wrong configuration. E.g. if you try to perform operations that demands a radio side cover, without having such.

• Choose another program or contact Your local Geodimeter dealer for a program installation.• Upgrade your instrument with the radio option.

Tries to modify the current display- or output-table.

To be able to modify the current table, you must first select an-other table to be the current.

Tries to send a command with illegal syntax on the serial channel.

Check the command and change the syntax. Note that only bigletter commands are allowed.

• Tries to choose an illegal display- or output-table.• Tries to choose a display- or output-table that does not exist.• Tries to create an illegal U.D.S.

• Tries to access a Job- or Area-file that does not exist.• Tries to access an illegal program.

Illegal way of creating a Job- or Area-file

Tries to insert a label in the editor when you have a Job No orArea No in the display.

Info 27 - 34

Info Codes

Info 35 – Data error

Cause:

Info 36 – Memory full

Cause:

Action:

Info 41 – Wrong label type

Cause:

Action:

Info 42 – U.D.S. program memory full

Action:

Info 43 – Calculation error

Action:

Info 44 – Not enough data for calculation

Cause:

Action:

Info 45 – Incompatible device

Cause:

Wrong data input, e.g. value out of range or alpha sign in anumeric value.

• Too many point codes in the point code library (Program 45) ortoo many characters in the point codes.

• Too long display- or output-table.• Internal memory full.

• Use less characters in the point codes.• Shorten the tables or use fewer tables.• Install more memory at your local dealer or delete unused files.

This label type can not be attached to this specific label.

Choose another label or use another label type.

Delete unused U.D.S. programs or shorten the programs.

Redo the procedure.

The program needs more points for the calculation, P20, FreeStation.

Measure more points and redo the calculation.

The unit is not compatible. Tries to change format to a Geodat402/500.

Info 35 - 45

Info Codes

Info 46 – GDM power error

Cause:

Action:

Info 47 – U.D.S call stack error

Cause:

Action:

Info 48 – No or wrong station establishment

Cause:

Action:

Info 49 – No GDM connected

Cause:

Info 51 – Memory lost

Action:

Info 53 – A/D overrange (A/D=Analog/Digital convertercircuit)

Cause:

Action:

Info 54 – Memory lost

Action:

Info 46 - 54

RPU can not switch on GDM.

Redo the procedure. If the error appears again leave the instrumentto authorized service.

You have used call in too many steps (max 4 steps).

Check the U.D.S's and decrease the number of calls.

• The station labels has been changed since the station wasestablished.

• The station is not established.

Perform a station establishment.If using a RPU and if the station has been established earlier, fetchstation data with menu 66 .

Trying to run a function or an application from a detached key-board unit without having contact with an instrument.

Leave the instrument to authorized service.

Error in the angle measurement system.

If the error appears frequently leave the instrument to authorizedservice.

Leave the instrument to authorized service.

Info Codes

Info 103 – No carrier

Cause:

Action:

Info 107 – Channel busy over the telemetry link

Action:

Info 122.6 – Radio not connected (Can also show info 22.6)

Cause:

Action:

Info 123 – Time out (Can also show info 23.6)

Cause:

Action:

Info 125 – Invalid channel

Cause:

Action:

Info 153 – Limit switch engaged

Cause:

Info 155 – The horizontal positioning is not good enough

Action:

Disturbance or no contact over the telemetry link.

Change channel or decrease the distance between the RPU and theGDM.

Change channel.

• The radio is not connected to the Geodimeter.• The radio is not switched on.• The battery in the radio is drained.• The cables are not connected properly or are damaged.

Connect the radio to the Geodimeter and switch on the radio.

• The battery in the radio is drained.• The cables are not connected properly or are damaged.

Check the cable connections and examine the radio battery.

You have chosen a radio channel that cannot be accessed.

Choose another channel and retry.

Tries to position the instrument to an illegal angle.

If this error appears frequently leave the instrument to authorizedservice.

Info 103 - 155

Info Codes

Info 156 – The vertical positioning is not good enough

Cause:

Info 157 – The horizontal & vertical positioning isn't good enough

Action:

Info 158 – Can not find the target

Cause:

Action:

Info 161 – The target is lost

Cause:

Action:

Info 162 – Syntax error (see Info 30)

Info 166 – No measuring signal from prism

Cause:

Action:

Info 167 – Collimation error too large

Cause:

Action:

Info 156 - 167



• The aiming from the RPU is bad.• The measuring distance is too long.• The measuring beam was obstructed.

Try to aim the RPU towards the Station more accurate and removeany obstructing object. If possible try to reduce the measuringdistance.

• The aiming from the RPU is bad.• The measuring beam is obstructed.• The target was moved too fast.

Try to aim the RPU towards the Station more accurate and removeany obstructing object. If not in tracking mode, it is important tohold the target still while measuring.

The distance meter in the instrument or the prism is obstructed.

Remove any obstructing object from the instrument and the prism.

The collimation error during a test measurement was too large.

Increase the measuring distance. It is important to keep the RPUheld still during the measurement. If the error does not disappearleave the instrument to authorized service.

Info Codes

Info 174.7 – Distance measurement error

Action:

Info 201 – Calculation error (see Info 43)

Info 207 – Process queue overflow

Cause:

Action:

Info 217 – RS-232 Buffer Overflow

Cause:

Action:

Info 218 – Input string too long

Cause:

Action:

Info 241 – The RMT needs index

Cause:

Action:

Info 174 - 241

Redo measurement.

Too many commands sent too fast on the serial channel.

Wait for the result of one command before you send the next one.

Data was sent without an end sign.

Make sure that the command contains an end sign.

A command that is too long was sent on the serial channel.

Send a shorter command.

The control unit doesn't receive angle reference from RMT600TS

Tilt RMT600TS past the vertical plumb line and back again. Pressthe A/M key again.

* * *

Date post:	20-Apr-2015
Category:	Documents
Upload:	robert-szymanski
View:	315 times
Download:	47 times

Geoidimeter Tech Manual

Documents